JP6766421B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine including a holding device for holding a game ball.

Conventionally, as a game machine of this kind, for example, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine provided with a holding device for holding a game ball launched on a game board having a game area ( see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-95235 (page 10, FIG. 2)

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.

That is, there is a problem that the conventional game machine may not be able to improve the interest of the game using the holding device .

The present invention was made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine for improving the amusement of the game using the pending device.

The present invention has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.
That is, the invention according to claim 1 is
A game board with a game area where game balls can flow down,
A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball flowing down the game area is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. Variable entry means that changes to the open state,
A ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not an advantageous gaming state is generated based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means is provided.
The symbol is variablely displayed in a manner according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means.
When the result of the lottery is a specific result, as the advantageous gaming state, by performing a right-handed game, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state occurs.
A gaming machine that switches to a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous gaming state.
At least, a holding device that changes to a holding state in which the game ball launched during the right-handed game can be held and a holding state in which the holding of the game ball is released.
A detection means for detecting whether or not a game ball is held in the holding device,
A winning opening in the game area, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball.
An operating means that receives an operation of the player, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state.
A distribution operation is performed that changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball that has been released from holding to win in the winning opening. Sorting member and
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member,
An effect including the display of an operation request requesting the operation of the operation means, the operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is advantageous. the detection means in a state in which a gaming state in which the left-handed player after the game state end based on a predetermined condition is satisfied in the case of detecting the hold of the game ball, a command to display unit It is characterized by having an operation effect control means.

According to the invention described in Operation and Effect according to claim 1, thereby improving the amusement of the game using the pending device.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game using the pending device.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine of Example 1 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in the state which is attached to the inner frame. It is an enlarged view of the lower right game area of the game board shown in FIG. 2 for explaining the holding device. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate is removed from the holding device shown in FIG. It is an enlarged view around the distribution movable valve shown in FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the transition of a distribution movable valve. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device, FIG. 9A shows a state in which the main decorative symbols are aligned, and FIG. 9B shows a state in which the sub-decorative symbols are aligned. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows 1st symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball lending control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing executed by the CPU of a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal process executed by the CPU of a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal effect execution management process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the music start timing adjustment processing by a sub control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game processing during a round by a sub-control device. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 in the jackpot state, and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 in a jackpot state. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3 in a jackpot state. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 4 in a jackpot state. It is a timing chart which shows the suggestion timing and an example of the operation timing of the 2nd frame button. It is a timing chart following FIG. 33. It is a timing chart following FIG. 34. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device during the jackpot state. (C) and (d) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 36. (E) to (j) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 37. (K) to (p) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 38. It is a figure which shows the lower right game area of the game board which is performing the movable pattern suggestion effect in a big hit state. It is a figure which shows the mode that the game ball discharged from the holding device shown in FIG. 40 enters a general winning opening. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the decorative plate was removed from the holding device of FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the decorative plate was removed from the holding device of FIG. 41. It is a figure which shows the lower right game area similar to FIG. 40. It is a figure which shows the mode that the game ball discharged from the holding device shown in FIG. 44 is not entered into a general winning opening. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the decorative plate was removed from the holding device of FIG. 44. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate is removed from the holding device of FIG. 45. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the music start timing adjustment processing during the reach production by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process during reach production by a sub-control device. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve during the reach effect, and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion production example 2 during the reach production. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion production example 3 during the reach production. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion production example 4 during the reach production. It is a figure which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect which is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device during a reach effect. It is a figure which shows the lower right game area of the game board in the state which the game ball is held. It is a figure which shows the lower right game area of the game board in a state where a game ball is not held. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board attached to the inner frame in Example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the music start timing adjustment processing during the reach production in a normal game state by a sub-control device. It is a table for determining the start timing of the music used for the reach production and the music used for the reach production. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect during the reach effect in a normal game state. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of Example 4 in the state which is attached to the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of Example 5 in the state which is attached to the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of Example 6 in the state which is attached to the inner frame. It is an enlarged view of the lower right game area in the game board of Example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart of the lower limit start time setting process during the reach effect by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the full tank detection performed by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start time performed by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the music switching timing adjustment process by the full tank detection performed by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the music switching timing adjustment process by the lower limit start time performed by a sub control device. It is a table that determines the time of the adjustment effect and the music being processed to suggest the movable pattern. This is a table for determining the lower limit start time and the music being processed for suggesting a movable pattern. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 by the full tank detection during the reach effect in a normal game state. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 by the lower limit start time during the reach effect in a normal game state. It is a flowchart of opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start round performed by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the music switching timing adjustment processing in the lower limit start round by a sub-control device. This is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music being processed for the movable pattern suggestion effect. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve based on the full tank detection during a jackpot effect, and the suggestion timing of a movable pattern suggestion effect. It is a timing chart following FIG. 80. It is a flowchart of opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart of the difficulty level selection process of the movable pattern suggestion effect by a sub-control device. (A) to (c) are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion image display. (A) to (c) are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movable pattern different from that of FIG. 84 of the distribution movable valve and the suggestion image display. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device during the jackpot state. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 86. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main control device of Example 9. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a movable cycle changing process of the distribution movable valve in the normal process of FIG. 88. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub control device of Example 9. This is a table for determining the adjustment time and the music being processed for suggesting a movable pattern. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the 8 round jackpot state. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main control device of Example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the movable pattern change process of the distribution movable valve in the normal process of FIG. 93. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the jackpot state in the probability change state. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example following FIG. It is a table for determining the time of the adjustment production and the music being produced to suggest the movable pattern. It is a table following FIG. 97.

The present specification also discloses the following inventions relating to game machines.
In the following embodiments, unless otherwise specified, the directions of up / down / left / right and front / back (or back / front) will be described with reference to a state in which the game board is viewed from the front, that is, a front view of the game board.

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine including a holding device for holding a game ball.

Conventionally, as a game machine of this kind, for example, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine provided with a holding device for holding a game ball launched on a game board having a game area. In this type of game machine, when the game ball is held in the holding device, the player operates the release operation button to release the holding by the holding device, and the game ball released from the holding device is a big hit. Some are configured to enter a general winning opening that does not participate in the lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235 (page 10, FIG. 2)).

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional game machine, when the game ball is held in the holding device, the player operates the hold release button in order to put the held game ball into the general winning opening, but holds it more than that. There is no merit to hold the game ball in the device. On the contrary, even if the game ball is not held in the holding device, the player only needs to have the game ball launched into the game area aiming at the starting winning opening or the like directly enter the general winning opening. There is a problem that it may be troublesome to operate the hold release button every time the game ball is held in the hold device.

This is a problem that also occurs in a game machine of a type in which a game ball held in a holding device is entered into a start winning opening or a large winning opening.

The following inventions relating to (0), (A1), (B1), (C0), (C1), (D1), and (E1) were made in view of such circumstances, and the game was played on the holding device. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that enhances the merit of holding a ball and enhances the fun of a game using a holding device.

(A1) A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and
A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball flowing down the game area is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. Variable entry means that changes to the open state,
A ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means is provided.
A game machine that executes a game in which the variable ball-entry means changes between the open state and the closed state a plurality of times as the special game state when the result of the lottery is a specific result.
A holding device that changes to a hold state in which at least a part of the game balls launched toward the variable ball entry means can be held and a release state in which the hold of the game ball is released.
A winning opening in the game area, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball.
An operating means that receives an operation of the player, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state.
A distribution operation is performed that changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball that has been released from holding to win in the winning opening. Sorting member and
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member,
The special game is an effect including display of an operation request requesting the operation of the operation means, in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising an operation effect control means for controlling display on a display means during a state.

According to the invention described in (A1) above, the player shakes the operation means by operating the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display means during the special gaming state. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the releasing state at the timing when the dividing member comes to the second position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize in the winning opening via the distribution member that comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives an operation of the player other than this timing, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the releasing state does not match the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. The game ball discharged from the holding device is difficult to win in the winning opening. Therefore, the player actively launches the game ball during the special game state, actively participates in the operation effect displayed on the display means during the special game state, and displays the operation request during the operation effect. If the operating means can be operated well in time with the timing, in addition to the game value that the player can enjoy based on the entry into the variable entry means during the special gaming state, the number of game balls held in the holding device Only game balls can be put into the winning opening, and a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of balls can be obtained during the special game state. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device can be improved.

In addition, the holding device can hold a part of the game balls launched toward the variable ball entry means in the special game state. As a result, the player can hold some of the fired game balls in the holding device by continuously firing the game balls toward the variable ball entry means during the special game state. In order for the game ball held in the holding device to win a prize in a winning opening other than the variable ball entering means, it is necessary to operate the operating means well at the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation effect. Therefore, it is possible to give technical intervention to winning a prize in a winning opening other than the variable ball entering means in the special gaming state.

The right-handed game is an operation of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the area on the right side of the game area when the game machine is viewed from the front.

(A2) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
A display effect control means for selecting a predetermined display effect from a plurality of patterns of display effects displayed on the display means during the special game state and displaying the display effect on the display means is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect is displayed on the display means as a part of the predetermined display effect.

According to the invention described in (A2) above, the operation effect is displayed on the display means as a part of a predetermined display effect selected from the display effects of a plurality of patterns displayed on the display means during the special gaming state. Will be done. As a result, the player has a chance (as an operation effect) to obtain a predetermined game value during the display effect displayed on the display means during the special game state, so that the player can enjoy the special game effect. Can be improved.

(A3) In the gaming machine according to (A1) or (A2) above,
The operation effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect is displayed on the display means based on the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special gaming state.

According to the invention described in (A3) above, for example, if a predetermined time is set as the minimum time required for the holding device to hold the game balls to the upper limit number or a number close to the upper limit number, the game balls are held in the holding device. Since the player can participate in the operation effect while the holding device is sufficiently held, it is possible to improve the fun of the game using the holding device.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above.
The timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is multiple times during one operation effect.
The operation effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the operation request is displayed a plurality of times in accordance with the timing when the distribution member, which is present a plurality of times, comes to the second position.

According to the invention described in (A4) above, the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is multiple times during one operation effect, and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position at a plurality of times is matched. Since the operation effect in which the operation request is displayed a plurality of times is displayed on the display means, the player needs to operate the operation means a plurality of times in accordance with the timing of the operation request being displayed a plurality of times. As a result, the player can actively participate in the operation effect displayed on the display means.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above.
The display effect and the operation effect are effects that accompany the reproduction of music.
A part of the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position matches the rhythm of the predetermined part of the music.
The display effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the operation request is displayed in accordance with the rhythm of a predetermined portion of the music.

According to the invention described in (A5) above, the display effect and the operation effect are effects that accompany the reproduction of music, and a part of the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position is the rhythm of a predetermined part of the music. The display effect displays the operation request according to the rhythm of the music. As a result, while entertaining the player with the act of operating the operation means according to the operation request displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, the player can actively participate in the operation effect displayed on the display means. it can.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above.
The distribution operation control means controls the distribution operation of the distribution member so as to repeat the distribution operation at a constant movable cycle.
The operation effect control means includes a timing at which the game ball, which is released from the hold of the holding device when the operation means receives an operation of the player at the timing when the operation request is displayed, reaches the distribution member. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect is displayed on the display means so that the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is matched.

According to the invention described in (A6) above, the sorting member repeats the sorting operation at a constant movable cycle, but when the operating means receives the operation of the player at the timing when the operation request is displayed. Since the operation effect is displayed on the display means so that the timing at which the game ball that releases the hold of the holding device reaches the distribution member and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position match, the operation request can be made. If the player operates the operating means at the displayed timing, the timing at which the game ball that releases the hold of the holding device reaches the distribution member and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position match. The production can be realized.

(A7) In the gaming machine according to (A6) above,
When it is a predetermined time from the timing when the hold of the hold device is released to the timing when the game ball discharged from the hold device reaches the distribution member due to the release of the hold.
The operation effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the operation request is displayed before the predetermined time before the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position.

According to the invention described in (A7) above, a game in which the distribution member is discharged from the holding device by releasing the holding for a predetermined time (from the timing when the holding of the holding device is released) rather than the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. Since the operation request is displayed before the timing when the ball reaches the distribution member), the holding of the holding device is released even though the operating means is operated by the player at the timing when the operation request is displayed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the timing at which the game ball reaches the distribution member and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position do not match.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to (A6) or (A7) above,
The operation effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the start timing of the display effect in the special gaming state is adjusted.

According to the invention described in (A8) above, the operation effect control means adjusts the start timing of the display effect in the special gaming state. That is, the start timing of the display effect is determined according to the timing of the establishment of the start condition based on the ball entry detection by the predetermined ball entry means, but (if there is a hold of the variation display, the variation display that is held earlier). (Although it is determined in consideration of the time until the end of), the movable member repeats the distribution operation at a constant movable cycle, so when the display effect is simply started according to the timing when the start condition is satisfied, When the operation means receives the operation of the player at the timing when the operation request is displayed, the holding of the holding device is released. The timing when the game ball reaches the distribution member and the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. May not match. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that both timings do not match by adjusting the start timing of the display effect in the special game state so that both timings match by the operation effect control means.

(A9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8) above.
The distribution member is a gaming machine characterized in that the distribution operation is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to see.

According to the invention described in (A9) above, since the sorting operation of the sorting member is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, even if the operating means is operated while visually observing the sorting member, the sorting member is sorted. It becomes difficult to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the member changes from the first position to the second position.

(A10) In the gaming machine according to (A9) above,
A game machine in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the distribution member operates faster than the operation of other operation members.

According to the invention described in (A10) above, the mode in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the distribution member operates faster than the operation of the other operating member. Even a player who is accustomed to the operation speed of the game ball becomes difficult to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the distribution member changes from the first position to the second position.

(A11) In the gaming machine according to (A9) or (A10) above,
The mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that the sorting member is easily visible from the front side in the front view of the game machine and from the front side in the front view of the game machine with respect to the holding device. A gaming machine characterized in that a member for lowering is arranged.

According to the invention described in (A11) above, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that the holding device is viewed from the front side of the game machine in front view and from the front side of the game machine in front view. This is an embodiment in which a member that reduces the visibility of the distribution member is arranged. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the distribution member located behind the member is in the first position or the second position. Therefore, the timing when the distribution member is in the second position and the timing when the holding of the game ball is released It becomes difficult to match.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A9) to (A11) above.
The mode in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the member that reduces the visibility is operated.

According to the invention described in (A12) above, the mode in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the mode in which the member that reduces the visibility is operated, and thus is located behind the operating member. Since it is difficult to visually recognize whether the distribution member is in the first position or the second position, it is difficult to match the timing when the distribution member is in the second position with the timing when the holding of the game ball is released.

(A13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A9) to (A12) above.
The mode in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that a light emitting means for emitting light from the back side of the distribution member is provided on the back side of the holding device in front view of the game machine, and the light emitting means emits light. A gaming machine characterized in that the mode is to be used.

According to the invention described in (A13) above, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the light emission that emits light from the back side of the sorting member to the back side of the holding device when viewed from the front of the game machine. It is a mode in which a means is provided and the light emitting means emits light. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the position of the distribution member is the first position or the second position due to the light emitted from the back side of the distribution member. Therefore, the timing when the distribution member is in the second position and the game ball It becomes difficult to match the timing of releasing the hold of.

(B1) A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down,
A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball flowing down the game area is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. Variable entry means that changes to the open state,
A ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not an advantageous gaming state is generated based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means is provided.
The symbol is variablely displayed in a manner according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means.
When the result of the lottery is a specific result, as the advantageous gaming state, by performing a right-handed game, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state occurs.
A gaming machine that switches to a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous gaming state.
At least, a holding device that changes to a holding state in which the game ball launched during the right-handed game can be held and a holding state in which the holding of the game ball is released.
A winning opening in the game area, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball.
An operating means that receives an operation of the player, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state.
A distribution operation is performed that changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball that has been released from holding to win in the winning opening. Sorting member and
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member,
An effect including the display of an operation request requesting the operation of the operation means, the operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is advantageous. A gaming machine comprising: an operation effect control means for controlling display on a display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the gaming state.

According to the invention described in (B1) above, if the player fires a game ball by hitting right during an advantageous gaming state, a part of the fired game balls is held in the holding device. Therefore, the game ball can be held in the holding device by an easy operation during the advantageous game state. Here, the game ball held in the holding device may remain even after switching to the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state. Even in such a case, the player has the operation means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed. By operating, the holding device can be changed from the holding state to the releasing state at the timing when the sorting member comes to the second position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize in the winning opening via the distribution member that comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives an operation of the player at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the releasing state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Since there is no prize opening, it becomes difficult to win a prize. Therefore, if the player performs a right-handed game during the advantageous game state, the player can perform a left-handed game even if the game ball held in the holding device remains after switching from the advantageous game state to the game state in which the left-handed game is performed. It is possible to actively participate in the operation effect displayed on the display means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game state to be performed, and to operate the operation means well at the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation effect. If possible, in addition to the benefits that the player can enjoy during the advantageous game state, a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls remaining in the holding device can be obtained in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after switching. .. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device can be improved.

Further, the player tends to lose the motivation to continue the game after the end of the advantageous gaming state, but the operation effect is displayed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the left-handed gaming state after the end of the advantageous gaming state. If it is known that there is a chance to obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held in the holding device by the operation effect, the left-handed game state after the end of the advantageous game state is also determined. Until the conditions are met, it becomes easy to motivate the player to continue the game.

The right-handed game is an operation of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the area on the right side of the game area when the game machine is viewed from the front. The left-handed game is an operation of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the area on the left side of the game area when the game machine is viewed from the front.

(B2) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball-entry means is a special gaming state in which a special game in which the variable entry means changes between the open state and the closed state is executed a plurality of times.

According to the invention described in (B2) above, the advantageous gaming state is a special gaming state in which the special gaming state in which the variable ball entry means changes between the open state and the closed state is executed a plurality of times. It is possible to enhance the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the special game state.

(B3) In the gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2) above.
The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which, after the end of the special gaming state, the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the specific result is increased.

According to the invention described in (B3), the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes a specific result is increased after the end of the special gaming state. It is possible to enhance the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device during the probability game state, and improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the high probability game state. ..

(B4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above.
The advantageous gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that, after the end of the special gaming state, the time for displaying the variation of the symbol is shortened.

According to the invention described in (B4) above, the advantageous gaming state is a time-saving state in which the time for displaying the variation of the symbol is shortened after the end of the special gaming state, so that the holding device is played during the time-saving state. It is possible to enhance the merit of holding the ball and improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the time saving state.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B4) above.
At least, the game ball launched during the right-handed game is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the state changes between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. 2nd start ball entry means and
A second ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second start ball entry means,
A second lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause the advantageous gaming state based on the detection of the game ball by the second ball entry detecting means, and
At least a game ball passage detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball launched during a right-handed game,
Based on the detection of the game ball by the game ball passage detecting means, the third lottery means for performing the third lottery as to whether or not the second starting ball entering means is set to the open state, and the third lottery means.
In the advantageous gaming state, when the result of the third lottery is the result of opening the second starting ball entering means after the end of the special gaming state, the second starting entering is performed in another gaming state. The time when the ball means is in the open state is longer than the time when the ball means is in the open state, or the number of times when the second start ball entry means is in the open state is larger than the number of times when the second start ball entry means is in the open state. A gaming machine characterized by being in a gaming state.

According to the invention described in (B5) above, the advantageous gaming state is when the result of the third lottery is the result of opening the second starting ball entry means after the end of the special gaming state described above. In the gaming state of, the second starting ball entering means is in the open state for a longer time (number of times) than the time (number of times) in which the second starting ball entering means is opened. It is possible to enhance the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above.
A variable display effect selection means for selecting a predetermined variable display effect from a plurality of patterns of variable display effect whose symbol is changed based on the lottery result by the lottery means is provided.
The predetermined condition constitutes a part of a specific combination in which the variation display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state represents the specific result as a result of the lottery. A gaming machine including a predetermined reach effect performed by displaying a symbol, and the display time of the predetermined reach effect is at least longer than the display time of the operation effect.

According to the invention described in (B6) above, in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state, the variable display effect constitutes a part of a specific combination representing a specific result as a result of the lottery. When the display time of the reach effect is longer than at least the display time of the operation effect, the operation effect is displayed on the display means, so that the left side after the end of the advantageous gaming state includes the predetermined reach effect to be displayed and performed. It is possible to entertain the player with the display time of the reach effect in the game state in which the hitting game is performed.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to (B6) above,
In the reach effect, a pattern including an expected effect having a predetermined height of expectation suggesting that the advantageous gaming state is reached and an expectation degree suggesting that the advantageous gaming state is reached are the expected effects. Including at least a pattern that includes a higher specific expectation effect as a component,
The predetermined condition is a pattern in which the predetermined reach effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state includes the specific expected effect as a component. A game machine characterized by being something.

According to the invention described in (B7), the predetermined reach effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state becomes the advantageous game state. When the pattern includes a specific expected effect higher than the expected effect whose suggested degree of expectation is a predetermined height, the operation effect is displayed on the display means, so that the left-handed hit after the end of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with the display time of the reach effect including the specific expected effect in the game state in which the game is performed.

(B8) In the gaming machine according to (B6) or (B7) above.
The predetermined condition is a second specific result in which the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the advantageous game state in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state, and the second specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display effect selected after the result includes the predetermined reach effect.

According to the invention described in (B8) above, the lottery result by the lottery means is not the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous gaming state ends, and the second specific result is the second specific result. When the variable display effect selected after the result includes the above-mentioned predetermined reach effect, the operation effect is displayed on the display means, so that the lottery is performed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state. When the lottery result by the means is a specific result that does not make the advantageous gaming state, a predetermined opportunity is given after the second specific result that the game ball held during the previous advantageous gaming state is won in the winning opening. By giving it during the reach production, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the second specific result that is not in the advantageous gaming state.

(B9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B6) to (B8) above.
In the reach effect, a pattern including an expected effect having a predetermined height of expectation suggesting that the advantageous gaming state is reached and an expectation degree suggesting that the advantageous gaming state is reached are the expected effects. Including at least a pattern that includes a higher specific expectation effect as a component,
The predetermined condition is a second specific result in which the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the advantageous game state in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state, and the second specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined reach effect leading to a result is a pattern including the specific expected effect.

According to the invention described in (B9) above, the reach effect is a pattern including an expected effect having a predetermined height of expectation suggesting that the game is in an advantageous gaming state, and an advantageous gaming state. In a game state in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state, the lottery result by the lottery means is an advantageous game, including at least a pattern in which a specific expected effect having a higher expectation level than the expected effect is included in the constituent elements. When the second specific result is not a state and the predetermined reach effect leading to the second specific result is a pattern including the specific expected effect, the operation effect is displayed on the display means. As a result, when the lottery result by the lottery means performed after the end of the advantageous gaming state is the second specific result that is not in the advantageous gaming state even though the specific expected effect with a high degree of expectation is included. By giving the winning opening an opportunity to win a game ball held during the previous advantageous game state during a predetermined reach effect, the advantageous game state is established even though the variable display effect including the specific expected effect is executed. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of not having a specific result.

(B10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B9) above.
A holding ball detecting means for detecting a game ball held in the holding device,
The operation effect control means uses the operation effect as the display means based on the determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied and that the holding ball detecting means has a game ball held in the holding device. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to the invention described in (B10) above, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player by executing the operation effect even though there is no game ball held by the holding device.

(B11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B10).
A gaming machine characterized by having the configuration according to any one of (A2) to (A11).

According to the invention described in (B11), the same operation and effect as that of the gaming machine according to any one of (A2) to (A11) is exhibited.

(C0) A game board having a game area in which the game ball can flow down,
A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball flowing down the game area is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. Variable entry means that changes to the open state,
A ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means is provided.
A gaming machine in which a predetermined display effect is displayed on the display means based on the result of the lottery being a predetermined result.
A holding device that changes to a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a holding state in which the holding of the game ball is released.
A winning opening in the game area, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball.
An operating means that receives an operation of the player, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state.
A distribution operation is performed that changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball that has been released from holding to win in the winning opening. Sorting member and
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member,
An effect including a display of an operation request requesting an operation of the operation means, the operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is defined. A gaming machine comprising: an operation effect control means for controlling display on the display means after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the display effect of the above.

According to the invention described in (C0) above, in the operation effect displayed on the display means, the player operates the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed, so that the distribution member is second. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the releasing state according to the timing of coming to the position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize in the winning opening via the distribution member that comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives an operation of the player at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the releasing state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Since there is no prize opening, it becomes difficult to win a prize. Therefore, if the player can successfully operate the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation effect, the player does not have a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held in the holding device. It can be obtained in a special gaming state. Further, since the operation effect is displayed on the display means after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined display effect displayed based on the result of the lottery, the start timing of the operation effect It is not necessary to perform complicated control to determine the operation effect, and the memory usage for appropriately executing the operation effect can be reduced. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device can be improved.

The predetermined display effects described above include, for example, a specific reach effect in a normal gaming state (for example, a super reach effect having a longer reach effect period than other reach effects), and an effect during a jackpot round in a jackpot state (hereinafter, A jackpot effect), a display effect that indicates a right-handed advantageous game state (probability change state, time saving state, etc.) (for example, a production that changes the background color of the screen to a color different from the normal game state or special game state, or a right-handed advantageous game There is a display effect such as "Please hit right" to let you know that you are in a state. In such an example, at the start time of a predetermined display effect, in the operation effect started after the lapse of a predetermined time, the timing at which the operation request is displayed and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position Adjustments are made to match.

(C1) A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down,
A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
A variable entry ball that is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and changes into a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the closed state. Means and
A ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means is provided.
The symbol is variablely displayed in a manner according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means.
A gaming machine that repeatedly changes the variable ball-entry means into the open state and the closed state as the specific game state when the result of the lottery is a specific result.
At least, a holding device that changes to a holding state in which a game ball launched in a right-handed game can be held in a non-special game state other than the special game state, and a holding state in which the holding of the game ball is released.
A winning opening in the game area, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball.
An operating means that receives an operation of the player, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state.
A distribution operation is performed that changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball that has been released from holding to win in the winning opening. Sorting member and
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member,
An effect including the display of an operation request requesting the operation of the operation means, the operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is not performed. A gaming machine comprising: an operation effect control means for controlling display on a display means during a special gaming state and a specific variable display according to the result of the lottery.

According to the invention described in (C1) above, in the operation effect displayed on the display means, the player operates the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed, so that the distribution member is second. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the releasing state according to the timing of coming to the position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize in the winning opening via the distribution member that comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives an operation of the player at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the releasing state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Since there is no prize opening, it becomes difficult to win a prize. In addition, the player plays a right-handed game during the non-special game state, and is active in the operation effect displayed on the display means during the non-special game state and during the specific variation display according to the result of the lottery. If the operation means can be operated well at the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation production, the predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held in the holding device can be set to the non-special game. Since it can be obtained in the state, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player in the non-special game state to participate in the game. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device can be improved.

In the non-special game state, not only the normal game state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result is the normal probability, but also the lottery result by the lottery means after the end of the special game state is the specific result. It also includes a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of becoming is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and a time-saving state in which the variable display time is shortened.

(C2) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The specific variation display is a specific reach effect performed by displaying a symbol forming a part of a specific combination representing the specific result as a result of the lottery, and at least more than the display time of the operation effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a specific reach effect in which the variable display is performed for a long time.

According to the invention described in (C2) above, the specific variation display is a specific reach effect in which the variation display is performed for at least a time longer than the display time of the operation effect. As a result, by having the player participate in the game using the holding device performed during the specific reach effect, it is possible to reduce the player getting bored with the reach effect having a long fluctuation time such as the specific reach effect.

(C3) In the gaming machine according to (C2) above,
The operation effect control means performs a right-handed notification to notify the player that the right-handed game will be performed during the specific variation display, and after the right-handed notification and during the specific variation display, A gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect is displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (C3) above, the operation effect is displayed on the display means by the operation effect control means after the right-handed notification is performed by the operation effect control means during the specific variation display. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player from missing the opportunity to hold the game ball in the holding device during the specific variation display.

(C4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3) above.
The game board is characterized in that, in the non-special game state, the game ball launched in the right-handed game is more likely to be held by the holding device than in the specific game state.

According to the invention described in (C4) above, the game ball launched in the right-handed game is more likely to be held by the holding device in the non-special game state than in the specific game state depending on the configuration of the game board. In the special gaming state, the player can be made to actively perform a right-handed game during a specific variable display.

(C5) In the gaming machine according to (C4) above,
The game board is characterized in that, in the non-special game state, a guide member for guiding the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device is provided.

According to the invention described in (C5) above, the game ball launched in the right-handed game in the non-special game state is guided to the holding device by the guiding member provided on the game board, and thus becomes the holding device by adjusting the nails. It is possible to guide the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device more reliably than in the case of guiding.

(C6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3) above.
The game board is configured so that the game ball launched in the right-handed game is more likely to be held by the holding device in the specific fluctuation display than in the fluctuation display different from the specific fluctuation display. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the invention described in (C6) above, depending on the configuration of the game board, the game ball launched in the right-handed game is held in the specific fluctuation display rather than in the fluctuation display different from the specific fluctuation display. Since it is easy to be held by the device, although it is the original game that the player performs a right-handed game during a specific fluctuation display in the non-special gaming state, the player displays other fluctuations in the non-special gaming state. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a game that deviates from the original game of performing a right-handed game is performed.

(C7) In the game machine according to (C6), the game board is provided with a guiding member for guiding the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device during the specific variation display. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the invention described in (C7) above, the game ball launched in the right-handed game during the specific variation display is guided to the holding device by the guiding member provided on the game board, and is therefore held by the nail adjustment. It is possible to guide the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device more reliably than in the case of guiding to the device. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of performing a right-handed game aiming at the guiding member during a specific fluctuation display.

(D1) A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and
A holding device that changes to a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a holding state in which the holding of the game ball is released.
A detection means for detecting a game ball held in the holding device,
A winning opening in the game area, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball.
An operating means that receives an operation of the player, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state.
A distribution operation is performed that changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball that has been released from holding to win in the winning opening. Sorting member and
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member,
A means for controlling a display effect including an operation effect in which an operation request image for requesting an operation of the operation means is displayed, and when the detection means detects a game ball held by the holding device, the said. It is characterized by including a display effect control means for controlling the timing at which the operation request image is displayed so that the operation effect is displayed on the display means in accordance with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. A game machine to play.

According to the invention described in (D1) above, in the operation effect displayed on the display means, the player operates the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed, so that the distribution member is second. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the releasing state according to the timing of coming to the position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize in the winning opening via the distribution member that comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives an operation of the player at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the releasing state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Since there is no prize opening, it becomes difficult to win a prize. Therefore, in order for the display effect including the above-mentioned operation effect to be displayed, the player needs to keep firing the game ball until the game ball is held by the holding device and detected by the detection means. It is possible to reduce the stoppage that interrupts the launch of the game ball inside. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device can be improved.

(D2) In the gaming machine according to (D1) above,
The holding device is provided with an upper limit number determining means for determining whether or not the holding upper limit number of gaming balls is held based on the detection of the game balls by the detecting means.
When it is determined that the upper limit number of game balls to be held is held, the effect control means adjusts the timing at which the operation request image is displayed to the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect is controlled to be displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (D2) above, when it is determined by the upper limit number determination means that the upper limit number of game balls is held in the holding device, the operation request image is obtained by the effect control means. Since the operation effect is displayed according to the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position, the operation effect is displayed even when only the game balls that are less than the upper limit of the hold are held. This makes it possible to reduce the complexity of the player.

(D3) In the gaming machine according to (D2) above.
A lower limit timing determining means for determining whether or not the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing for starting the operation effect is provided.
When it is determined that the upper limit number of game balls is held again by the time when the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing, the effect control means determines the operation request image. A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which is displayed is controlled so that a new operation effect that matches the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (D3) above, when it is determined that the upper limit number of game balls to be held is held again by the time it is determined that the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing, the operation request is made. Since a new operation effect that matches the timing at which the image is displayed at the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position is displayed on the display means, the maximum number of game balls to be held is held during the execution period of the display effect. Even after the operation effect is displayed, the maximum number of game balls to be held is held again by the time the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing, and a new operation effect is displayed (as a result, a new game value is displayed). Aiming to receive the grant of), the player can actively fire the game ball.

(D4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D3).
A lower limit timing determining means for determining whether or not the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing for starting the operation effect, and
A second determination means for determining whether or not a holding lower limit number of game balls, which is at least less than the holding upper limit number, is held in the holding device based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means.
The operation request image is when it is determined that at least the lower limit number of game balls is held by the time when the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing. A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which is displayed is controlled so that the display means is displayed with the operation effect that matches the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position.

According to the invention described in (D4) above, when it is determined that at least the lower limit number of game balls to be held is held before the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing, the effect control is performed. Depending on the means, the display means displays an operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. As a result, even if it is determined by the first determination means that the upper limit number of game balls to be held is not held in the holding device, at least the lower limit number of holdings is reached before the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing. When it is determined that the game ball is held, the display means displays an operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Even though the game ball is held in the holding device, it is possible to reduce the attenuation of the game motivation due to the operation effect not being displayed only because the holding upper limit number is not reached.

(D5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4) above.
The operation effect includes a first operation effect in which the operation request image is displayed in the first operation mode, and a second operation mode in which the operation request image is displayed in a second operation mode that is easier for the player to operate than the first operation mode. Including at least 2 operation effects,
The display means is provided with a difficulty level selection display means for displaying a selection image capable of selecting at least which of the first operation effect and the second operation effect to be displayed.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that an operation effect selected during display of the selected image by the difficulty level selection display means is displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (D5), the operation effect is a first operation effect in which the operation request image is displayed in the first operation mode, and a second operation mode in which the player is easier to operate than the first operation mode. A selection image that includes at least a second operation effect in which an operation request image is displayed, and at least one of the first operation effect and the second operation effect can be selected by the difficulty level selection display means. Is displayed on the display means, and the operation effect selected during the display of the selected image is displayed on the display means by the effect control means. Therefore, the player who does not like the difficult operation can select the second operation effect. A player who can or does not can select the first operation effect. In this way, it is possible to provide an operation effect according to the preference of the player.

(D6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above.
The distribution operation of the distribution member has a plurality of types of movable cycles including a first movable cycle and a second movable cycle having different cycles.
The distribution operation control means includes a movable cycle changing means for changing the movable cycle from the first movable cycle to the second movable cycle.
The display effect control means adjusts the timing at which the operation request image is displayed to the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position according to the type of the movable cycle changed by the cycle changing means. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the operation effect.

According to the invention described in (D6), the distribution operation of the distribution member has a plurality of types of movable cycles including a first movable cycle and a second movable cycle having different cycles, and the movable cycle changing means is used. Even when the movable cycle is changed from the first movable cycle to the second movable cycle, the distribution member sets the timing at which the operation request image is displayed to the second position according to the type of the changed movable cycle. The operation effect according to the coming timing is displayed by the display effect control means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the operation timing of the movable member as compared with the case where the distribution operation is performed in the same movable cycle.

(D7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D6) above,
The distribution operation of the distribution member has a plurality of types of movable patterns including a first movable pattern and a second movable pattern having different timings of change between the first position and the second position.
The distribution operation control means includes a movable pattern changing unit that changes the movable pattern from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern.
The display effect control means adjusts the timing at which the operation request image is displayed according to the type of the movable pattern changed by the movable pattern changing unit to the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. A game machine characterized by displaying the above-mentioned operation effect.

According to the invention described in (D7), the distribution operation of the distribution member includes a plurality of types including a first movable pattern and a second movable pattern in which the timing of changing between the first position and the second position is different. Even when the movable pattern is changed from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern by the movable pattern changing portion, the operation request image is displayed according to the type of the changed movable pattern. The display effect control means displays an operation effect that matches the timing with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to detect the operation timing of the movable member than when the distribution operation is performed with the same movable pattern.

(D8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above.
The distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation at a predetermined movable cycle at least before the operation effect is started.
The display effect control means sets the timing at which the operation request image is displayed between the time when the game ball held in the holding device is detected by the detection means and the time when the operation effect is started. An adjustment effect that adjusts to match the timing at which the component member comes to the second position is executed.
As the adjustment effect, the display effect control means has a plurality of types of adjustment effects having different lengths of time during which the adjustment effect is executed, and is held in the holding device by the detection means for the predetermined movable cycle. A game machine characterized in that the adjustment effect of the different length determined according to the timing at which the game ball is detected is controlled to be displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (D8) above, since the distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation in a predetermined movable cycle at least before the operation effect is started, the distribution operation is repeated in the middle of the predetermined movable cycle. When the timing at which the game ball held by the holding device is detected (that is, the timing at which the operation effect in the display effect is started) arrives, the display effect control means is held by the detecting means in the holding device. During the period from the detection of the sphere to the start of the operation effect, an adjustment effect is executed in which the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is adjusted so as to match the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. As this adjustment effect, the display effect control means has a plurality of types of adjustment effects in which the length of time during which the adjustment effect is executed is different, and the game ball held in the holding device by the detecting means for a predetermined movable cycle. The display means displays the adjustment effect of different lengths determined according to the detected timing. As a result, even when the timing at which the game ball held by the holding device is detected (that is, the timing at which the operation effect in the display effect is started) arrives in the middle of the predetermined movable cycle, the operation request image Can be adjusted so that the timing at which is displayed and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position do not deviate from each other.

(D9) In the gaming machine according to (D8) above,
The display effect control means is a gaming machine characterized by having a plurality of types of the adjustment effect having a length shorter than the length of time during which the operation effect is executed.

According to the invention described in (D9) above, since the display effect control means has a plurality of types of adjustment effects having a length shorter than the length of time during which the operation effect is executed, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed can be determined. , When the image for the adjustment effect of a plurality of types is stored in the memory in order to match the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position, the image for the operation effect of a plurality of types is stored in the memory. It is possible to reduce the amount of memory used compared to the case where the memory is used.

(D10) In the gaming machine according to (D8) above.
The display effect control means is a gaming machine characterized by having a plurality of types of the adjustment effect having an image having an amount of information smaller than that of an image for displaying the operation effect.

According to the invention described in (D10), since there are a plurality of types of adjustment effects having an image having a smaller amount of information than the image for displaying the operation effect, the length of the adjustment effect and the length of the operation effect are tentatively the same. Even in the case of, in order to match the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position, images for adjusting effects of a plurality of types (for example, still images) are stored in the memory. In the case of making the image, the amount of memory used can be suppressed as compared with the case of storing an image (for example, a moving image) for operation effect of a plurality of types in the memory.

(D11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above.
The distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation at a predetermined movable cycle at least before the operation effect is started.
The display effect control means has a plurality of types of operation effects having different lengths of time for the operation effect to be executed, and the game ball held in the holding device by the detection means for the predetermined movable cycle is detected. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect of the different length determined according to the timing to be performed is controlled to be displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (D11) above, the distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation at a predetermined movable cycle at least before the operation effect is started, and the display effect control means has the operation effect. It has a plurality of types of operation effects having different lengths of execution time, and has different lengths of operation effects determined according to the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is detected by the detecting means for a predetermined movable cycle. Since it is displayed on the display means, even when the timing at which the game ball held by the holding device is detected (that is, the timing at which the operation effect in the display effect is started) arrives in the middle of the predetermined movable cycle. , It is possible to adjust so that the timing at which the operation request image is displayed and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position do not deviate from each other.

(D12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D8) to (D11) above.
The distribution operation control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the distribution operation in a predetermined movable cycle is executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to see.

According to the invention described in (D12) above, since the distribution operation control means executes the distribution operation in a predetermined movable cycle in a manner that is difficult for the player to see, it is predetermined before the operation effect is started. Even if the distribution operation is repeated in the movable cycle of, the player decodes the movable cycle of the distribution operation, and based on the timing obtained by decoding, adjusts the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. It is possible to reduce that the operating means is operated to obtain a predetermined game value.

(E1) A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down,
A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball flowing down the game area is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. Variable entry means that changes to the open state,
A ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means is provided.
A gaming machine in which a predetermined display effect is displayed on the display means based on the result of the lottery being a predetermined result.
A holding device that changes to a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a holding state in which the holding of the game ball is released.
A winning opening in the game area, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball.
An operating means that receives an operation of the player, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state.
A distribution operation is performed that changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball that has been released from holding to win in the winning opening. Sorting member and
An operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect including the display of the operation request requesting the operation of the operation means to be displayed on the display means during the display of the predetermined display effect.
A distribution operation control means that controls the distribution operation of the distribution member at a timing that is not synchronized with the start timing of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect.
The operation effect control means adjusts at least one of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. A game machine characterized by doing.

According to the invention described in (E1) above, the holding device changes into a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a holding state in which the holding of the game ball is released. The winning opening where a predetermined game value is obtained based on the entry of the game ball is provided at a position in the game area where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device. The operating means receives a player's operation, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state. The distribution member changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening. Minute operation is performed. The operation effect control means controls the display means to display the operation effect including the display of the operation request requesting the operation of the operation means on the display means during the display of the predetermined display effect. The distribution operation control means controls the distribution operation of the distribution member at a timing that is not synchronized with the start timing of the predetermined display effect and operation effect. Here, if no measures are taken, there is a concern that the timing at which the operation request is displayed may deviate from the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Therefore, the operation effect control means adjusts at least one of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position.

As a result, in the operation effect displayed on the display means, the player operates the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed, so that the player holds the distribution member at the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. The device can be changed from the hold state to the release state. Further, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize in the winning opening via the distribution member that comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives an operation of the player at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the releasing state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Since there is no prize opening, it becomes difficult to win a prize. Therefore, if the player can successfully operate the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation effect, the player can obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held in the holding device. Can be done. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device can be improved.

(E2) In the gaming machine according to (E1) above,
The operation effect control means uses the display means to adjust the start timing of the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled to be displayed.

According to the invention described in (E2) above, the timing at which the operation request is displayed can be adjusted to the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position, and a predetermined display effect is produced by the adjustment effect in addition to the operation effect. It is possible to improve the interest in.

(E3) In the invention described in (E1) above,
The operation effect control means is characterized in that the length of the operation effect is adjusted so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. ..

According to the invention described in (E3) above, the timing at which the operation request is displayed can be adjusted to the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position, and the operation is performed according to the length of the operation effect. It is possible to improve the interest in a predetermined display effect including the effect.

(E4) In the invention according to any one of (E1) to (E3) above.
A gaming machine comprising the configuration according to at least one of the above (A1) to (D12).

According to the invention according to (E4), the invention described in any one of (E1) to (E3) has the same effect as the invention described in at least any one of (A1) to (D12) described above. Can be played.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 in a state of being attached to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 3 is a front view for explaining the holding device 400. It is an enlarged view of the lower right game area 30a3 of the game board 30 shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view around the distribution movable valve 409 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the distribution movable valve 409. FIG. 7 is a back view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. 9A and 9B are explanatory views showing the display contents of the third symbol display device, FIG. 9A shows a state in which the main decorative symbols are aligned, and FIG. 9B shows a state in which the sub-decorative symbols are aligned. ..

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall (hall), and one side portion (for example, the front surface) of the outer frame 11. An inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with the left side portion in view as an opening / closing axis, and an inner frame using one side portion (for example, the left side portion in front view) of the inner frame 12 as an opening / closing axis It is provided with a front frame set 14 that can be opened and closed with respect to 12.

The outer frame 11 is formed of a wooden plate material in a rectangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a machine screw. In the present embodiment, for example, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 in the vertical direction is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left-right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may be made of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

As shown in FIG. 1, the inner frame 12 is roughly divided into a lower plate unit 13 attached to the lowermost portion thereof and an opening / closing in the vertical direction on the left side of the inner frame 12 in a range above the lower plate unit 13. It includes a front frame set 14 that can be opened and closed with the shaft as the axis, and a game board 30 (see FIG. 2) that can be detachably attached to a resin base (not shown) having a rectangular outer shape.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate unit 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by fasteners such as screws. On the front side of the lower plate unit 13, a lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 17, a game ball launch handle 18, and a sound output port 24 are provided. The lower plate 15 as a ball receiving plate is provided in a substantially central portion of the lower plate unit 13, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower plate 15. The ball pulling lever 17 is for pulling out the game ball in the lower plate 15. By moving the ball pulling lever 17 to the left side in FIG. 1, a predetermined portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 is opened, and the lower side is opened. The game ball stored in the plate 15 can be pulled out downward through the opening portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15. The game ball launch handle 18 is arranged so as to project to the front side on the right side of the lower plate 15. In response to the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player, the game ball is driven into the game board 30 described later by the game ball launcher 38. The game ball launching device 38 is composed of, for example, a game ball launching handle 18 and a launching device 229 (see FIG. 8). The sound output port 24 is an output port for outputting sound from a speaker provided in or on the back of the lower plate unit 13.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable, and like the inner frame 12, an opening / closing shaft extending vertically to the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It can be opened to the front side with the axis as the axis.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper plate 19 as a saucer for a game ball is integrally provided in the lower part of the front frame set 14 (above the lower plate 15 described above). Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing the game balls and guiding them toward the game ball launching device 38 while arranging them in a row. Further, the front frame set 14 is formed with a substantially elliptical window portion 101 so that most of the game area 30a (see FIG. 2) of the game board 30 can be visually recognized from the outside. Specifically, the window portion 101 is a frame body having a substantially elliptical shape in which the substantially central portion on the left and right sides is curved relatively gently as compared with the upper and lower sides, and the center is hollow. A glass plate 137 having a substantially elliptical shape is attached to the hollow portion of the above. The glass plate 137 has a double glass structure. The substantially central portion of the window portion 101 may be linear, and the glass plate 137 may also be adapted to the shape. Further, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material thereof may be used as long as it is a transparent plate having a predetermined strength.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a first frame button 20 and a second frame button 21 that receive an operation instruction (for example, a pressing instruction) by a player at a position on the lower left side of the upper plate 19. It has. As shown in FIG. 8, the first frame button 20 is connected to the sub control device 262. The second frame button 21 is connected to the main control device 261. For example, when a predetermined operation valid condition is satisfied, the operation of the first frame button 20 becomes effective, and by pressing the frame button 20, the screen display of the third symbol display device 42 changes, or the output sound is changed. , The lamp display is changed, and the player can actively participate in the game. The second frame button 21 has a shape imitating the striking surface of a drum, and is used for an operation of changing the holding device 400 from the holding state to the releasing state as described later.

In addition, the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the window portion 101 (for example, a corner portion) on the front side thereof. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by controlling the change of the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. For example, an annular illumination portion 102 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided symmetrically on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101, and the central portion of the annular illumination portion 102 and the uppermost portion of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Similarly, a central illumination unit 103 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, the central illumination unit 103 functions as a jackpot lamp and lights up or blinks at the time of the jackpot to notify that the jackpot is in progress. In addition, a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up during the payout of the prize ball and an error display lamp 106 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on the left and right sides of the central illumination unit 103. Further, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided so as to be adjacent to the lower end portion of the annular illumination portion 102 so that a part of the inner frame 12 surface, the game board 30 surface, and the like can be visually recognized. Since the predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, a certificate stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be suitably read by a machine from the flat portion of the small window 107.

Further, a ball lending operation unit 120 is arranged below the window unit 101, and the ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121, a return button 122, and a frequency display unit 123. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls can be rented according to the operation. Will be done. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 19 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The frequency display unit 123 displays the balance information of the card or the like. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, eliminates the need for the ball lending operation unit 120. Therefore, a decorative sticker or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball rental operation unit 120. As a result, it is possible to standardize the ball lending operation unit between the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is made of a square plywood, and is attached in a state where the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the resin base (not shown) of the inner frame 12, and is substantially in the center of the front side of the game board 30. The partial gaming region 30a is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 101 (glass plate 137) shown in FIG. 1 having a substantially circular shape based on a resin. Note that FIG. 2 shows only the portion of the inner frame 12 corresponding to the size of the game board 30, and the illustration of other regions is omitted.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31a, a general winning opening 31b, a variable winning device 32, a first starting opening 33a (for example, a belly button), a first starting opening 33b (for example, an electric chew, an operating chucker), and a second starting. It is provided with a mouth 34 (for example, a through gate), a variable display device unit 35, and the like. These parts are individually arranged in each through hole formed by router processing in the game board 30, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. A game ball enters the above-mentioned general winning openings 31a and 31b, the variable winning device 32 and the first starting openings 33a and 33b, and the winning ball is detected by a detection switch described later, and based on the output of this detection switch. , A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15). A ball entry detection switch 31c is provided at the first starting port 33a. A ball entry detection switch 31d is provided at the first starting port 33b. A passage detection switch 34a is provided at the second starting port 33b. The entry of the ball into the first starting ports 33a and 33b serves as a starting condition for the first symbol display device 40 and the third symbol display device 42 to start the variable display of the first symbol and the third symbol. There is. The passage to the second starting port 34 is a starting condition for the second symbol display device 41 to start the variable display of the second symbol.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and a game ball that has not entered various winning devices or the like is passed through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). It is supposed to be guided to the direction. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball.

The variable display device unit 35 passes through the first symbol display device 40 and the second start port 34, which variablely display the first symbol (for example, a special symbol), triggered by winning a prize in the first start ports 33a and 33b. The second symbol display device 41 that variablely displays the second symbol (for example, a normal symbol) and the third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) are variablely displayed with the winning of the first starting ports 33a and 33b as a trigger. A third symbol display device 42 is provided. The first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are identifications that allow the player to identify whether or not the result of the variable display of the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol is in a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, respectively. Information.

The first symbol display device 40 is, for example, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) two-color light emitting type LEDs (light emitting diodes) 40a and 40b, and a hold indicating the number of hold of variable display by the LEDs 40a and 40b. It is equipped with a lamp 40c. The number of times the game ball has passed through the first starting ports 33a and 33b is held up to four times, and the number of times held is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 40c. The hold lamp 40c may have a configuration such as a hold display on a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 42. The LEDs 40a and 40b can emit light in red and blue, for example. The first symbol display device 40 alternately changes the emission color of each of the LEDs 40a and 40b to generate a variable display state of the first symbol (in this embodiment, the emission color aspect of each of the LEDs 40a and 40b). For example, in the case of a light emitting mode in which both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in a blue light emitting state, it indicates that the first special gaming state (for example, a normal jackpot state) has been won. Further, in the case of the light emitting mode in which the LED 40a stops in the blue light emitting state and the LED 40b stops in the red light emitting state, it indicates that the second special gaming state (for example, the time saving jackpot state) has been won. Further, in the case of the light emitting mode in which both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in the red light emitting state, it indicates that the third special gaming state (for example, the probability variation jackpot state) has been won. Further, in the case of a light emitting mode in which the LED 40a stops in the red light emitting state and the LED 40b stops in the blue light emitting state, it indicates that the LED 40a is out of the light (decided to the special gaming state).

As the first symbol display device 40, a single LED of a type capable of emitting light of at least three colors may be adopted, and the first symbol may be emitted by alternately emitting light of each color. When the LED stops in the light emitting state of the first color, it shows a probabilistic jackpot, when the LED stops in the light emitting state of the second color, it shows a normal jackpot, and the LED emits a third color. When stopped in the state, it may indicate a time saving jackpot, and when the LED stops in the light emitting state of the fourth color, it may indicate a disconnection.

The second symbol display device 41 includes a display unit 41a on which, for example, "○" is drawn for the second symbol, a display unit 41b on which, for example, "x" is drawn for the second symbol, and a holding lamp 41c. When each time the game ball passes through the second starting port 34, for example, the display symbol (ordinary symbol) by the display units 41a and 41b fluctuates, and the variation display stops at the predetermined symbol, the lower third The starting port 33b of 1 is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the second starting port 34 is held up to four times, and the number of times held is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 41c. The display units 41a and 41b have LEDs (light emitting diodes) inside the display units 41a and 41b, and are configured to be variablely displayed by switching the light emission (or lighting of the lamp) of the LEDs.

The third symbol display device 42 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 45 described later. On the third symbol display device 42, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 described later, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Each decorative symbol row L, M, R is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols, and these decorative symbols are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each decorative symbol row L, M, R. It has become so. Further, the third symbol display device 42 can also display a special game moving image in which an image of a predetermined character or the like is operated during a period in which the opening / closing operation member changes between the open state and the closed state. In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes, for example, a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9.3 inches. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround the third symbol display device 42. The above-mentioned third symbol display device 42 corresponds to the image display device in the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 2, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win, and is in an open state in which the game ball is likely to win in the event of a big hit and a normally closed state. It is operated repeatedly. Such a state in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated in the open state and the normal closed state at the time of a big hit is called a special gaming state (for example, a big hit state), and a large number of games are played in the variable winning device 32. Since the ball wins (wins) and a large amount of game balls are paid out in response to the prize, the gaming state is advantageous for the player.

More specifically, when the game ball wins a prize for the first starting ports 33a and 33b, the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40 are variablely displayed, and the display of the LEDs 40a and 40b after the fluctuation is stopped is preset. A special gaming state occurs when the combination of light emitting modes is achieved.

In this embodiment, the variable winning device 32 has a door member 32b that opens and closes the big winning opening 32a, and when either the normal big hit state or the probabilistic big hit is won, the door member 32b falls forward and is predetermined. It is configured so that the game ball is in an open state and it is easy to win a prize. Specifically, in the variable winning device 32, a predetermined number of times (a number of times corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds) of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is set with the lapse of a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings in the open state as one round. ) It is opened repeatedly. For example, one round is set to end (door member 32b is closed) based on the fact that 30 seconds have passed from the opening of the door member 32b or there is a winning detection for 10 game balls. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is equipped with a rail unit 50 for guiding the game balls launched from the game ball launching device 38 (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 30. The game ball launched by the rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is guided to a predetermined game area 30a through the ball guide passage 49 described later of the rail unit 50. The rail unit 50 is composed of a ring-shaped resin molded product (for example, one molded by adding fluororesin), and has an inner rail 51 and an outer rail 52 integrally formed with inner and outer doubles. .. The inner rail 51 is formed in a substantially annular shape except for about 1/4 above, and the outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side portion) faces the inner rail 51. In such a case, the guide rail is formed by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and the ball guide passage 49 is formed by the portion (the portion on the left side when facing) in which the respective rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval. .. The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove shape in which the front side is open.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 51. As a result, the situation in which the game ball once guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the upper part of the game board 30 returns to the inside of the ball guide passage 49 can be prevented. It has become. Further, the return rubber 54 is attached to the outer rail 52 at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball (upper right portion in FIG. 2: a portion corresponding to the tip end portion of the outer rail 52). Therefore, the game ball launched with a force equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is bounced off. On the inner surface of the outer rail 52, a sliding plate 55 as a long stainless steel metal band is provided in order to make the flight of the game ball smoother, that is, to reduce the frictional resistance of the game ball. It is attached.

Further, an arc-shaped flange 56 is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the rail unit 50 so as to project outward from the periphery in a front view. The flange 56 constitutes a mounting surface for the game board 30. When the rail unit 50 is attached to the game board 30, the flange 56 is brought into contact with the game board 30, and in that state, screws or the like are inserted into a plurality of through holes formed in the flange 56 to form the game board. The rail unit 50 is fastened to the 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper, lower, left and right ends of the rail unit 50 are formed substantially linearly (flatly) when viewed from the front. That is, the flanges 56 are cut off at the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the rail unit 50 so that the rail diameter can be expanded in a finite region of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the gaming region 30a on the gaming board 30 can be expanded. It has become.

At the entrance of the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, a convex portion 57 is formed so as to close a part of the ball guide passage 49. The convex portion 57 is provided in a substantially vertical direction from the inner rail 51 to the lower end of the rail unit 50, and a foul ball that does not reach the game area 30a and flows back in the ball guide passage 49 is provided on the inner frame 12. It serves to guide the ball passage (not shown). The lower right corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30 are spaces for attaching stickers (S1 and S2 in FIG. 2) such as certificate stamps (for example, the serial number is written) and plates. In order to secure this attachment space, notches 58 and 59 are formed in the flange 56. By sticking stickers such as certificate stamps (S1 and S2 in FIG. 2) to the lower right corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30, the game board 30 and the certificate stamp can be unique.

Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 30a is divided into substantially circular sections by the inner peripheral portions (inner and outer rails) of the rail unit 50, and particularly in the present embodiment, the game area 30a is divided on the board surface of the game board 30. The game area 30a is configured to be much larger than the conventional one. In the present embodiment, the distance from the uppermost point of the outer rail 52 to the lower part of the game board 30 is 445 mm (58 mm longer than the conventional product), and the distance from the far left position of the outer rail 52 to the far right position of the inner rail 51. The distance is 435 mm (50 mm longer than the conventional product). The distance from the far left position of the inner rail 51 to the far right position of the inner rail 51 is 418 mm.

In the present embodiment, when the game area 30a is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the area surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, excluding the area of the guide rail which is a parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52. Area. Therefore, the game area 30a does not include the guide rail portion. The limit position on the left side of the game area 30a is specified by the inner rail 51. The right side limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52 and the components of the inner frame 12 arranged along the outer rail 52. Further, the lower limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the lower end position of the game board 30. Further, the upper limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width of the game area 30a (maximum width in the horizontal direction) is 418 mm, and the height of the game area 30a (maximum width in the vertical direction) is 445 mm.

Although disclosure of detailed drawings is omitted, game balls are supplied to the game ball launcher 38 one by one from the ball outlet on the front frame set 14 side (the ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 19). ..

In the game area 30a, a third symbol display device 42 is arranged at a position slightly above the central portion, and a plurality of nails are arranged on the left lateral side of the third symbol display device 42. Is formed. Further, the game area 30a has a width narrower than the width of the left side narrow region 30a1 from the upper side to the vicinity of the center on the right side of the third symbol display device 42 and is wide enough for one game ball to finally pass through. The upper right narrow region 30a2 is formed, and is connected to the downstream side of the upper right narrow region 30a2 from the vicinity of the center to the lower side of the right lateral side of the third symbol display device 42 from the width of the upper right narrow region 30a2. Is also wide, and a lower right game area 30a3 having a plurality of flow paths of the game ball is formed. A second starting port 34, a first starting port 33b, and a variable winning device 32 are arranged in the lower right game area 30a3, and a plurality of game balls can be held on the left side of the variable winning device 32. The device 400 is provided, and the general winning opening 31b is provided on the lower left side of the holding device 400.

In the normal game state, an operation of launching a game ball from the left narrow region 30a1 toward the first starting port 33a (left-handed game) is performed. During the jackpot state (during the jackpot round game), an operation of launching a game ball from the right narrow region 30a2 aiming at the variable winning device 32 (right-handed game) is performed. In the case of a probability variation jackpot or a time-saving jackpot, a right-handed game is performed during the jackpot state, and a right-handed game aiming at the first starting port 33b is performed even during the probability variation state or the time-saving state after the jackpot state ends.

When a right-handed hit is performed to launch a game ball aiming at the upper right narrow area 30a2, the game ball exiting the upper right narrow area 30a2 passes through the second starting port 34. When the result of the lottery based on the passage detection of the second starting port 34 (the second symbol lottery) is a hit, the opening / closing member 33c (see FIG. 4) of the first starting port 33b is opened, and after a predetermined time It will be closed. The opening / closing member 33c is formed in a horizontally long substantially S-shape, and is inclined downward toward the left side. The game ball may enter the first opening 33b that is open, or may roll on the opening / closing member 33c that is closed and flow further downstream. The game ball entered into the first starting port 33b is detected by the entry detection switch 31d. The ball entry detection by the ball entry detection switch 31d is a starting condition for starting the variation display of the symbol. However, during the normal game state, the probability that the result of the second symbol lottery will be won is set to be very low as compared with the probability change state. Therefore, even if the player strikes right during the normal game state, it is difficult to expect the winning of the second symbol lottery and the opening of the opening / closing member 33c of the first starting port 33b. Therefore, the player strikes left during the normal game state. Be told.

Three nails are arranged in a V shape on the downstream side of the opening / closing member 33c, and the flow path of the game ball that rolls on the opening / closing member 33c and flows down is the variable winning device 32 side and the holding device 400 side. Branch left and right. The game ball diverted to the right side may enter the open large winning opening 32a if it is in the jackpot state, or pass in front of the closed large winning opening 32a from the lower right game area 30a3. It may be discharged and guided to the out port 36. Up to 5 game balls divided to the left are held by the holding device 400. When the hold is released, the game ball held by the holding device 400 is discharged toward the general winning opening 31b. The discharged game ball will enter the general winning opening 31b if it can be successfully placed on the distribution movable valve 409 described later. When a prize is detected in the general prize opening 31b, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. The holding device 400 can hold a part of the game balls fired toward the big winning opening 32a in the big hit state. For example, a flow path is formed so that one out of every 15 game balls passing through the three nails is diverted to the holding device 400 side.

In order to allow the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 to enter the general winning opening 31b, it is necessary to press the second frame button 21, which will be described later. However, as will be described later, since the distribution movable valve 409 operates in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, even if the player presses the second frame button 21 while visually observing the distribution movable valve 409, the holding device 400 It is difficult to put the game ball discharged from the above into the general winning opening 31b. Further, the general winning opening 31b is arranged in the lower right game area 30a3 at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless it is a game ball discharged from the holding device 400. On the other hand, the general winning opening 31a is arranged in the left narrow region 30a1 at a position where it is easier to enter the ball than the general winning opening 31b. In this way, it is difficult to expect the ball to enter the general winning opening 31b or the first starting opening 33b even if the player hits right in the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the general winning opening 31a or the first starting opening 33a A left-handed hit that can be expected to enter the ball is performed.

Next, the configuration of the holding device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. The cross section showing the state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 in FIG. 4 is shown as a cross section obtained by cutting the game board 30 in parallel with the game area.

The holding device 400 is configured to change between a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the lower right game area 30a3 can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released. The holding device 400 is configured to change from the holding state to the releasing state when the player presses the second frame button 21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the holding device 400 uses a horizontally long rectangular main body component 401 whose upper side is inclined downward in an oblique direction to the left, and a plurality of games using the upper surface of the main body component 401. A hold driven to a hold portion 403 that holds the ball, a hold position that dams the game ball stored in the hold portion 403, and a discharge position that allows the game ball held in the hold portion 403 to be discharged to the downstream side. It is provided with a state switching unit 405.

The holding portion 403 can hold a maximum of five game balls in an area surrounded by the upper surface of the main body part 401 and the pile-shaped game parts and nails arranged on the upper right side thereof (FIG. 44). After holding the five game balls, the holding unit 403 does not accept further holding of the game balls. In this case, the additional game ball may collide with the game ball held on the fifth ball and head toward the large winning opening 32a, or pass by the large winning opening 32a and pass the out opening 36 (see FIG. 2). ).

The holding state switching unit 405 has a rotating shaft at a position slightly upward from the upper left end of the holding unit 403, and includes a discharge blocking valve 406 driven to a holding position and a discharging position around the rotating shaft. ing. The holding position is a position where the discharge blocking valve 406 takes an upright posture so as to dam the game ball held by the holding portion 403. The discharge position is a position where the discharge prevention valve 406 takes a tilted posture so as to discharge the game ball held by the holding portion 403.

Switching between the holding position and the discharging position of the discharge blocking valve 406 is performed by the player pressing the second frame button 21. When the player presses the second frame button 21, the discharge blocking valve 406 is driven so as to tilt from the hold position to the discharge position, and one game ball held in the hold portion 403 is discharged. The discharge blocking valve 406 returns from the discharge position to the hold position at the timing when one game ball is discharged. As a result, each time the player presses the second frame button 21, the game balls stored in the holding unit 403 can be discharged one by one.

In the configuration example for driving the discharge blocking valve 406, a solenoid and a power transmission mechanism are arranged on the back surface of the game board 30, and when the pressing of the second frame button 21 is detected, the solenoid protrudes or is sucked, and the protrusion or suction thereof. The power transmission mechanism drives the discharge blocking valve 406 from the holding position to the discharging position according to the above. In this configuration, the solenoid operates in the opposite direction at the timing when one game ball is discharged, and the power transmission mechanism drives the discharge blocking valve 406 from the discharge position to the hold position according to the operation.

On the downstream side of the hold state switching unit 405, there is a shelter position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win the general winning opening 31b, and makes it easier for the game ball whose hold has been released to win the general winning opening 31b. A distribution movable valve 409 is provided, which performs a distribution operation that changes to the protruding position. Specifically, the distribution movable valve 409 is immersed in a recess that is recessed inward on the left side surface of the main body component 401 in the shunting position, and is driven so as to be exposed from the recess to the outside in the protruding position. Will be done. The distribution movable valve 409 is switched between a protruding position and a retracting position by a solenoid and a power transmission mechanism arranged on the back surface of the game board 30. The solenoid and power transmission mechanism for driving the distribution movable valve 409 are the same as the configuration for driving the distribution state switching piece 405 described above.

When the game ball ejected from the holding portion 403 gets on the distribution movable valve 409 in the protruding position, the game ball is guided from the distribution movable valve 409 to the general winning opening 31b, and the general winning opening 31b. To win a prize.

The distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409 is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to see. A mode in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is realized by a plurality of modes. Specifically, the first aspect in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the mode in which the distribution movable valve 409 operates at high speed. The distribution movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the protruding position and returns to the retracted position in, for example, about 0.9 seconds. Such an operation is, for example, sufficiently faster than the opening / closing speed of the door member 32b that opens / closes the large winning opening 32a, and is therefore difficult for the player to visually recognize. Therefore, normally, it is difficult to put the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 on the distribution movable valve 409 while the distribution movable valve 409 is in the protruding position to win a prize in the general winning opening 31b.

The operation of the distribution movable valve 409 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.

In FIG. 5, the position of the tip of the distribution movable valve 409 in the state of being located in the shunting position is referred to as P1, and the distribution movable valve 409 has a length of about half of the total length (a length slightly longer than half of the maximum protrusion amount). The position of the tip in the protruding state is called P2, and the position of the tip in the state where the distribution movable valve 409 is located in the protruding position is called P3. The movable iron core of the distribution movable valve 409 is sucked by passing an electric current through the solenoid, and is transferred from P1 to P3 via P2 in accordance with the movement of the movable iron core. Further, in the distribution movable valve 409, the movable iron core is pulled back by the restoring force of a spring or the like by shutting off the current to the solenoid, and the movable iron core is transferred from P3 to P1 via P2 according to the movement of the movable iron core. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 6, the distribution movable valve 409 is transferred from P1 to P2 over 0.2 seconds from the start of the movable timing 0.0 seconds to 0.2 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this). The period is called the first period). The game ball that falls to the height of the distribution movable valve 409 in the first period either falls without hitting the distribution movable valve 409, or is struck from the side (to the left) by the tip of the distribution movable valve 409. , It is difficult to win a prize in the general winning opening 31b without being guided to the general winning opening 31b.

The transition from P2 to P3 takes 0.1 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.3 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is called the second A period). It is transferred from P3 to P2 over 0.1 seconds from 0.6 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.7 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is called the second B period). The game ball that falls to the height of the distribution movable valve 409 in the second A period and the second B period is easy to get on the distribution movable valve 409, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and is easily won in the general winning opening 31b.

The distribution movable valve 409 stops at the position of P3 for 0.3 seconds from 0.3 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.6 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is called a third period). The game ball that falls to the height of the distribution movable valve 409 in the third period has the largest amount of protrusion of the distribution movable valve 409, so that it is surely guided to the general winning opening 31b and wins the most in the general winning opening 31b. easy.

The transition from P2 to P1 takes 0.2 seconds from 0.7 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.9 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is called the fourth period). Since the game ball that falls to the height of the distribution movable valve 409 in the fourth period is only slightly touched by the tip of the distribution movable valve 409, the game ball may fall to the side of the main body component 401 as it is. There are many. Therefore, in the fourth period, it is difficult to win a prize in the general winning opening 31b without being guided to the general winning opening 31b.

As described above, in the distribution movable valve 409, the distribution movable valve 409 has a short time to maintain the protruding position, and the transition from the shunting position to the protruding position (protruding operation) also shifts from the protruding position to the shunting position (returning). Operation) is also fast. Therefore, even if the player can see the operation of the distribution movable valve 409, it is difficult for the player to win the game ball held by the holding device 400 in the general winning opening 31b.

In the distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409, a mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize is adopted in addition to the speed of the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, the holding device 400 is arranged on the front side of the main body component 401, and is arranged on the front side of the colored and transparent resin decorative plate 413 and the decorative plate 413. It is equipped with a transparent resin movable decorative piece 415 with the characters "!". The decorative plate 413 is formed in a size that covers the distribution movable valve 409. The movable decorative piece 415 swings up and down in small steps behind the discharge blocking valve 406 and the distribution movable valve 409.

Here, if the distribution movable valve 409 and the movable decoration piece 415 start to move at the same moment, even if the distribution movable valve 409 operates in a manner that is difficult for the player to see, the movement of the movable decoration piece 415 From the timing, the operation timing of the distribution movable valve 409 may be predicted. However, in this embodiment, the movable decorative piece 415 starts to move at a timing different from the operation of the distribution movable valve 409. For example, the distribution movable valve 409 operates when the power of the game machine is turned on, while the movable decorative piece 415 operates when the ball enters the first starting port 33a. Since the distribution movable valve 409 and the movable decorative piece 415 operate in synchronization with each other, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the operation timing of the distribution movable valve 409 from the operation timing of the movable decoration piece 415. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the distribution movable valve 409 is in the retracted position or the protruding position, so that it becomes difficult to match the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 is in the protruding position with the timing when the holding of the game ball is released.

Further, the holding device 400 is provided with a holding region light emitting unit 417 that emits light toward the front side at a position adjacent to the discharge blocking valve 406 and the distribution movable valve 409. The light emitted from the holding area light emitting unit 417 is diffused by the decorative plate 413 and the movable decorative piece 415, and the diffused light makes it difficult to visually recognize the operation of the distribution movable valve 409. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the position of the distribution movable valve 409 is the retracted position or the protruding position, so that it becomes difficult to match the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 is in the protruding position with the timing when the holding of the game ball is released. ..

In this way, if the game ball is fired toward the big winning opening 32a during the big hit game, it is possible to hold the game ball in the holding device 400 at the same time. Further, the game ball held by the holding device 400 can be discharged from the holding device 400 at an arbitrary timing when the player operates the second frame button 21 to aim for winning the general winning opening 31b. .. However, as will be described later, the distribution movable valve 409 operates at a constant cycle from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and operates at a high speed as described above, and thus operates in a manner that is difficult for the player to see. Then, it is difficult to make the game ball held by the holding device 400 win the general winning opening 31b. In order to make the general winning opening 31b win the game ball held by the holding device 400, the player participates in the movable pattern suggestion effect suggesting the movable pattern of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409, as will be described later. There is a need.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, in the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally or stacked back and forth on the back surface (actually, the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30). Further, a game ball supply device (pain mechanism unit 352) for supplying the game balls, a protective cover made of resin, and the like are attached. In the present embodiment, various control boards are mounted separately on two mounting bases to form two control board units, and the control board units are individually mounted on the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. ing. In this case, the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262 shown in FIG. 8 to be described later are mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the payout control device 311 and the launch control device 312 shown in FIG. 8 to be described later are mounted. And the power supply device 313 is mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Here, for convenience, the former unit will be referred to as "first control board unit 201", and the latter unit will be referred to as "second control board unit 202".

Further, the payout mechanism portion 352 and the protective cover are also integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here. The detailed configuration of each unit 2001-203 will be described later.

The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured so that they can be attached and detached in unit units without using any tools, and in addition to this, a support shaft portion is partially provided. It is provided so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. This is also a device for making it possible to easily confirm the hidden configuration and the like even if the units 201 to 203 and other configurations are arranged one after the other.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 30, a prize detection mechanism for detecting the passage of a game ball such as various prize openings is provided. Specifically, a winning opening switch is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a counting switch is provided on the variable winning device 32. The count switch is a switch that counts winning balls. Further, operation port switches are provided at positions corresponding to the first start ports 33a and 33b, respectively, and the entry of the game ball into the first start ports 33a and 33b is detected by the operation port switch. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the second starting port 34, and the passage of the game ball to the second starting port 34 is detected by the operating port switch.

The winning port switch and the gate switch are connected to a board surface connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), and the board surface connection board is further connected to a main control board 261a (see FIG. 8) in a main control device 261 described later. ing. Further, the count switch is connected to the large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), and the large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown) is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, the operation port switch is directly connected to the main control board 261a without going through the relay board.

The variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid 432, which will be described later, for opening the large winning opening 32a. Further, the first starting port 33b is provided with an operating port solenoid for opening the electric accessory.

The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control board 261a in the main control device 261 described later, and the payout command (of the game ball) according to the winning situation each time is taken from the main control board 261a. The number of payouts) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board 311a. In such a case, the conventional method (so-called evidence ball method) in which the game balls that have won in various winning openings are once collected in the winning ball processing device, and the existence of the winning balls is confirmed one by one by the winning ball processing device and then paid out. ), In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball is electrically detected for each winning opening and the payout is immediately performed (that is, the winning ball processing device is abolished in the pachinko machine 10). are doing). Therefore, even if there are a large number of game balls to be paid out, the payout can be carried out as soon as possible. However, the conventional "proof ball method" may be applied to the present invention.

The first control board unit 201 has a substantially L-shaped mounting base (not shown), and a main control device 261 and a sub control device 262 are mounted on the mounting base. Here, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a described later, and the main control board 261a is housed in a board box 263 (encapsulating means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit (sealing means), whereby the substrate box 263 is sealed.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing unit as the sealing means as long as the box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened. However, in this embodiment, for example, five sealing members are connected. By inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole of this sealing member, the box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened. The sealing process by the sealing unit prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed, and once opened. It is possible to open and seal again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the elongated hole of at least one of the five sealing members constituting the sealing unit (not shown). Then, when the substrate box 263 is opened due to a defect of the housed main control substrate 261a or the like, the connection between the sealing member into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing member is cut. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing member. If the history of opening the board box 263 is left in the board box 263, it is easy to find out that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 263.

Further, the sub control device 262 includes a sub control board 262a described later, and the sub control board 262a is housed in a board box (not shown) made of a transparent resin material or the like. A power relay board (not shown) is mounted on the sub control device 262, and the power supplied from the power supply board described later is supplied to the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 via the power relay board (not shown). It is designed to be output to.

The second control board unit 202 has a horizontally long mounting base (not shown), on which the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board (not shown) are mounted. ing. The payout control device 311 includes a CPU that is the center of control, a control board including other ROMs, RAMs, various ports, etc., the launch control device 312 includes a launch control board, and the power supply device 313 is a power supply. It is equipped with a control board. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls. Further, the launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch device 229 (see FIG. 8) according to the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 controls various control devices and the like. The required predetermined power supply voltage is generated and output. The launching device 229 includes various types such as a mechanical launching component that launches a game ball by hitting it with a launching punch that operates according to the drive of a launch motor, and an electromagnetic launching component that launches a game ball by generating an electromagnetic field. Can be adopted. The card unit connection board (not shown) is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown), and the player takes in the command of the ball lending operation and pays it out. It is output to the control device 311. The card unit connection board 314 is not required in the cash machine in which the game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 19 from the ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board (not shown) are each housed in a board box (not shown) made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, similarly to the main control device 261 described above, the box base and the box cover constituting the board box (wrapping means) are unopenably connected by the sealing unit (sealing means), whereby the board is unopenable. The box is sealed.

The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch (not shown). For example, when the state return switch (not shown) is pressed when a payout error occurs such as a ball jam in the payout motor section, the payout motor 358a (see FIG. 8) is slowly rotated in the forward direction to clear the ball jam (normal state). (Return to) is planned.

Further, the power supply monitoring board 261b is provided with a RAM erase switch 323. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function so that it can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery). It has become. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. It is decided to put it in.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352.

The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 that opens upward at the uppermost portion thereof, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment (game island equipment) of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping downward toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Are concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 358a or the like. Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is supplied to the upper plate 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

Further, the tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for adding vibration to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened to and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Further, the vibrator 360 does not come into surface contact with the tank rail 356, but comes into contact with the two screw portions, so that the vibration generated by the vibrator 360 is more effectively transmitted to the tank rail 356. ing. Therefore, if a ball clogging occurs in the vicinity of the tank rail 356, the ball clogging is cleared by driving the vibrator 360.

A payout relay board (not shown) that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 352, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. is set up. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism portion 352 from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown) is all molded of a conductive resin material (for example, a conductive polycarbonate resin), and a part thereof is grounded. As a result, the generation of noise due to the charging of the game ball is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 7, an inner frame open detection switch 388 for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12. When the inner frame 12 is opened, it is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer in the hall (inside the pachinko shop).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a display control device 45, a power supply device 313, and the like. Hereinafter, these devices will be described in detail individually.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit that controls the main control. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 such as a game program and fixed value data, and various data when executing a control program stored in the ROM 502 such as necessary data according to the progress of the game. RAM 503, which is a memory for temporarily storing, etc., input / output port 505 for communicating with various devices, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, and used for various lottery. A random number generator (not shown) and a clock pulse generator circuit (not shown) used for time counting and synchronization are provided. These electronic components and electronic circuits are provided on the main control board 261a.

The RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and various data and the like are temporarily stored in the RAM 503. It has a memory and area for.

That is, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the normal process of FIG. 12, which will be described later, to the end, that is, until the RAM access prohibition in step S216 is completed. Therefore, the RAM 503 only needs to store and retain the contents of the counter buffer and the holding ball storage area when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs. The same applies hereinafter), and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when the power is turned on again. It can be restored to the state before cutting. Specifically, RAM 503 provides a dedicated backup area for storing values such as registers and I / O for game information during normal processing when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs. The same applies hereinafter). There is no need to install it in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 17 is immediately executed.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the payout control device 311 and the launch control device 312, the sub control device 262, the first symbol display device 40, and the second symbol display device 41, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505.

Further, the sub control device 262 is a CPU 551 or a CPU 551 that controls the voice and lamp display and the control of the display control device 45 in the variable display effect and the jackpot game effect according to the instruction from the main control board 261a in the main control device 261. ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the system, RAM 553 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in ROM 552, and bus line 554. And an input / output port 555 and the like are provided. These electronic components are provided with a sub-control board 262a.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout motor 358a. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The RAM 513 is provided with a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data and the like. The payout control device 311 is programmed to pay out 5 game balls for the prize of the general prize opening 31a and 15 game balls for the prize of the general prize opening 41b.

When the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 513 stores and holds information about the state at the time of power off so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. That is, the storage of the RAM 513 is executed when the power is turned off by the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) and the second half steps S1015 and S1016 (see FIG. 19) of the payout control process, and conversely, the stored information of the RAM 513 is restored. Is executed in the power recovery process when the power is turned on.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 261 and a launch control device 312, a payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 8, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and the launch device 229 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 includes a card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the above-mentioned card unit is connected to the pachinko machine 10) and a player. The touch detection signal S5 output when the game ball launch handle 18 is touched, and the launch stop switch 18a provided on the game ball launch handle 18 for stopping the launch is not operated. The launch permission signal S7 is output to the main control device 261 on condition that all of the launch maintenance signals S6 to be generated are input.

That is, the period when the launch permission signal S7 is ON (high level) is the launch permission state, and the period when the launch permission signal S7 is OFF (low level) is the launch disapproval state. That is, the main control device 261 sends the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) that controls the launch solenoid that launches the game ball to the launch rail during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is ON (high level). The ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) that controls the ball feed solenoid that feeds the game ball is repeatedly output to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition cycle. The launch control device 312 drives and controls the launch device 229 based on the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9, and launches the game ball with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18. On the contrary, the main control device 261 does not output the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312 during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is OFF (low level), and the launch device does not output. The game ball is not fired by 229.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) in the third symbol display device 42. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The output of the sub controller 262 is connected to the input of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the image controller 526 are connected to the input port 527. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531 and a third symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output of the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display on the third symbol display device 42 based on various commands transmitted by editing and transmitting various commands from the main control device 261 by the sub control device 262. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. It is a memory for.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing to read the third data. It is displayed on the symbol display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside, and uses a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. It is generated, and these + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

As shown in FIG. 8, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power supply monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. .. The power supply monitoring board 261b includes a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of AC 24 volt in the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the time when this voltage becomes less than 24 volt exceeds, for example, 20 milliseconds. , The power failure signal S1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal S1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 17).

In addition, even after the time when the AC 5 volt monitored by the power supply unit 541 becomes less than 5 volt exceeds 20 milliseconds, the power supply unit 541 has a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the resolution of the power failure), the data of the RAM 503 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 is the main control device. When the initialization command from 261 is received, the data in RAM 513 is cleared.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 9, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are set in the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device), and the decorative symbol rows L, Three decorative symbols, an upper decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a lower decorative symbol, are displayed in a variable manner for each of M and R. In the present embodiment, the third symbol includes a main decorative symbol SZ to which the numbers "0" to "9" are attached, and a sub-decorative symbol FZ of a plurality of types (for example, ●, ▲, ■, etc.). The main decorative symbols SZ are displayed in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the sub-decorative symbols FZ are arranged between the main decorative symbols SZ to form a series of decorative symbol rows L, M, and R. ing. Then, the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom, for example, with periodicity.

In such a case, the above series of decorative symbols are displayed in descending order (that is, in descending order of the number of the main decorative symbol SZ) in the left decorative symbol row L, and the same in the middle decorative symbol row M and the right decorative symbol row R. The series of decorative symbols are displayed in ascending order (that is, in descending order of the number of the main decorative symbol SZ). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol row L → the right decorative symbol row R → the middle decorative symbol row M, and at the time of the stop, the five effective lines on the third symbol display device 42, that is, the upper line L1 and the middle line L2. , The lower line L3, the right-up line L4, and the left-up line L5 can align the main decorative symbol SZ or the sub-decorative symbol FZ in a predetermined combination.

Specifically, the third symbol display device 42 usually hits a jackpot state or shortens the time based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ports 33a and 33b and the determination result of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. A predetermined identification information variation display effect (variation display effect of the third symbol) is performed to notify the success or failure of the jackpot state or the probability variation jackpot state. By displaying on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42 a state in which the main decorative symbols SZ (third symbols) are aligned with, for example, even-numbered symbols, the player is shown to win the normal jackpot state. Further, the main decorative symbols SZ (third symbols) are aligned on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42, for example, in odd-numbered symbols (the main decorative symbols SZ of "1" are aligned on the line L5 shown in FIG. 9A). By displaying the confirmation of the state), the player is shown to win the probability change jackpot state. In addition, a definite display of the state in which the sub-decorative symbols FZ are aligned on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42 (the state in which the sub-decorative symbols FZ of "●" are aligned on the line L2 shown in FIG. 9B) is displayed. Then, the player is shown the winning of the short-time jackpot state. Then, the third symbol display device 42 displays the special game moving image as a jackpot if the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are arranged in a combination of jackpot symbols.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses a random number related to the operation of the accessory and another random number used for the game to draw a lottery for the first symbol display device 40 (big hit lottery: first). (Big hit lottery of symbols) and symbol display settings, lottery of the second symbol display device 41 (winning lottery of the second symbol) and symbol display settings, and decorative symbols (third symbol) of the third symbol display device 42. A lottery related to variable display and its setting will be performed.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a random number related to the operation of the accessory, as shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot of the first symbol display device 40 based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33a. The first jackpot random number counter C1a used for the lottery, the first jackpot symbol counter C2a used for selecting the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 based on the entry into the first starting port 33a, and the first jackpot random number. The first initial value random number counter CINI1a used for setting the initial value of the counter C1a, and the second big hit random number counter C1b used for the jackpot lottery of the first symbol display device 40 based on the entry into the first starting port 33b. , The second jackpot symbol counter C2b used for selecting the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 based on the entry into the first starting port 33b, and the second jackpot random number counter C1b used for setting the initial values. The number of rounds to open the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 when the initial value random number counter CINI1b and the first big hit random number counter C1a become a big hit by winning the first starting port 33a (15 in the embodiment). The initial value of the round number determination counter CR for determining (either round or 2 rounds), the second symbol random number counter C4 used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 41, and the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 used for the setting is used.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as other random numbers to be used for the game, as shown in FIG. 10, in order to roughly specify the type of the variation pattern when selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42. The first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b used for selecting the stop pattern of the third symbol display device 42, the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 used for selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42, and the second. The second symbol off symbol counter C5 used for selecting the off symbol of the symbol display device 41 is used. Each of the above-mentioned counters is composed of a program executed by the CPU 501.

For example, "stop pattern 0" indicates a complete deviation variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of complete deviation fluctuation patterns, and "stop pattern 1" indicates a front-back deviation reach variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of front-back deviation reach fluctuation patterns. The "stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation consisting of a plurality of types of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, and the "stop pattern 3" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, and the "stop pattern 3" consists of a plurality of types of normal jackpot fluctuation patterns. The normal jackpot fluctuation pattern group is shown, the "stop pattern 4" is a time-saving jackpot fluctuation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of time-saving jackpot fluctuation patterns, and the "stop pattern 5" is a plurality of types of probabilistic jackpot fluctuations. It shows a group of probabilistic jackpot fluctuation patterns consisting of patterns.

For all of these counters C1a to C3a, C1b to C3b, C4, C5, CINI1a, CIN1b, CINI2, CS1 to CS3, "1" is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated (hereinafter referred to as "update"). It is a loop counter that returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG.

Further, the RAM 503 includes a first reserved ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) regarding entry of the first starting port 33a, and a first starting. A second holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for entering the ball into the mouth 33b is provided. For example, in each area of the first reserved ball storage area, the first jackpot random number counter C1a, the first jackpot symbol counter C2a, and the first stop pattern are selected according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting port 33a. The values of the counter C3a and the round number determination counter CR are stored in chronological order. Further, in each area of the second reserved ball storage area, the second jackpot random number counter C1b, the second jackpot symbol counter C2b, and the second stop pattern are selected according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting port 33b. Each value of the counter C3b is stored in chronological order.

Each of the above-mentioned counters will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The first jackpot random number counter C1a is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "738", reach the maximum value (that is, "738"), and then return to "0". In particular, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1a at that time is read as the initial value of the first jackpot random number counter C1a. The first initial value random number counter CINI1a is a loop counter similar to the first jackpot random number counter C1a (value = 0 to 738), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later. The first jackpot random number counter C1a is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later in this embodiment), and the RAM 503 is held at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33a. It is stored in the sphere storage area.

Similarly, the second jackpot random number counter C1b is also configured to be added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "738", reach the maximum value (that is, "738"), and then return to "0". It has become. In particular, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI1b at that time is read as the initial value of the second jackpot random number counter C1b. The second initial value random number counter CINI1b is a loop counter similar to the second jackpot random number counter C1b (value = 0 to 738), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later. The second jackpot random number counter C1b is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later in this embodiment), and the second jackpot 33b of the RAM 503 is set at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33b. 2 Stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The number of hit values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b, that is, the number of random number values to be jackpots, is set at two types, low probability (normal time) and high probability time, and is low. The number of random numbers that will be a big hit at the time of probability is 2, and the value is "350,700". The number of random numbers that will be a big hit at the time of high probability is 14, and the value is "50,101, 160, 209, 257, 310, 361, 418, 480, 517, 578, 635, 677, 730 ". In addition, the high probability time refers to a state in which a jackpot is achieved by a predetermined probability fluctuation symbol and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value, that is, a so-called "probability change", which is a normal time (low probability time). Refers to the time when it is not in such a probabilistic state. Further, in the normal gaming state, the opening time of the first starting port 33b is, for example, 1.0 second, whereas in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 33b is, for example, 3. Since it is 0.0 seconds, it is easier for the game ball to enter the first starting port 33b than the first starting port 33a in the probability change state and the time saving state.

The first jackpot symbol counter C2a is a symbol at the time of a jackpot when the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 40 (consisting of two LEDs 40a and 40b) is stopped (after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b in this embodiment). It determines the final light emission state of. In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "4", reach the maximum value (that is, "4"), and then return to "0". There is. The first jackpot symbol counter C2a is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later) as in the case of the first jackpot random number counter C1a described above, and the game ball is first started. It is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the mouth 33a is won. For example, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the values of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a are "0" and "4", both LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40 emit blue light. It stops in the state and shows the winning to the normal jackpot state. When the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the values of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a are "1" and "3", the LED 40a stops in the blue light emitting state and the LED 40b emits red light. Stop and show the winning to the short-time jackpot state. When the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a is "2", both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in the red light emitting state, and the probability variation jackpot state is won. Is shown. That is, the probability of change is 20% for winning the first starting port 33a. When the first jackpot random number counter C1a is off, both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in the off state regardless of the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a, indicating the disconnection.

The second big hit symbol counter C2b is a symbol at the time of a big hit when the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 40 (consisting of two LEDs 40d and 40e) is stopped (after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40d and 40e in this embodiment). It determines the final light emission state of. In this embodiment, the second jackpot symbol counter C2b is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "4", reaches the maximum value (that is, "4"), and then returns to "0". It has become. The second jackpot symbol counter C2b is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later) as in the case of the second jackpot random number counter C1b described above, and the game ball is first started. It is stored in the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the mouth 33b is won. For example, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot and the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b is "0", both LEDs 40d and 40e of the first symbol display device 40 stop in a blue light emitting state. , Shows the winning of the normal jackpot state. Further, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot and the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b is "4", the LED 40a stops in the blue light emitting state and the LED 40b stops in the red light emitting state, which shortens the time. Indicates the winning of the jackpot state. When the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot and the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b is "1" to "3", both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in a red light emitting state, and the probability variation jackpot Indicates the winning of the state. That is, the probability of change is 60% for winning the first starting port 33b. When the second jackpot random number counter C1b is off, both LEDs 40c and 40d stop in the off state regardless of the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b, indicating the disconnection.

Further, the first stop pattern selection counter C3a and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b are added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238), "0". It is configured to return to. In the present embodiment, regarding the winning of the first start port 33a, the first stop pattern selection counter C3a causes the decorative symbol to reach in the third symbol display device 42, and then the final stop decorative symbol is the reach decorative symbol. "Reach that is out of front and back" that stops by shifting only one before and after, and "Reach that is not out of front and back" that the final stop decorative symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach decorative symbol after the same reach occurs, and "Completely out of reach" that does not occur "Is decided to draw lots. Further, regarding the winning of the first starting port 33b, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b is used to draw lots for "front-rear out-of-front reach", "front-rear out-of-front reach", and "complete off-out" in the same manner as described above. There is. For example, C3a and C3b = 0 to 201 correspond to complete deviation, C3a and C3b = 202 to 208 correspond to front and rear deviation reach, and C3a and C3b = 209 to 238 correspond to non-front and rear deviation reach. The content of the lottery (reach lottery) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is whether the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability or a high probability, or the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40 is not activated. It may be set individually depending on whether it is activated, how many balls are reserved for operation at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, and the like. The first stop pattern selection counter C3a is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later), and the first hold ball of the RAM 503 is at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33a. Stored in the storage area. Similarly, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b is also updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later), and the RAM 503 is generated at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33b. It is stored in the second reserved ball storage area of.

The number of rounds determination counter CR is the number of rounds (15 in the embodiment) for opening the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 when the first big hit random number counter C1a becomes a big hit when the first starting port 33a is won. It is for determining either a round or two rounds). In this embodiment, the round number determination counter CR is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "4", reach the maximum value (that is, "4"), and then return to "0". ing. The round number determination counter CR is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later) as in the case of the first jackpot random number counter C1a described above, and the game ball is the first starting port. It is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the 33a is won. When the above-mentioned first big hit random number counter C1a is a big hit and the value of the round number determination counter CR is "0", the number of rounds for opening the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is, for example, 15 rounds. (Hereinafter, 15R is appropriately indicated), and the per 15R is executed. Further, when the above-mentioned first big hit random number counter C1a is a big hit and the value of the round number determination counter CR is "1" to "4", the number of rounds for opening the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32. Is executed, for example, per 2R for 2 rounds (hereinafter, 2R is appropriately indicated). That is, when a big hit (the first big hit random number counter C1a is a big hit) by winning the first starting port 33a, the number of rounds is multiple, such as 20% per 15R and 80% per 2R. The jackpot state to have is set.

When a big hit (the second big hit random number counter C1b is a big hit) is obtained by winning the first starting port 33b, for example, 15R hit is always executed (15R hit is 100%). In addition, a jackpot state in which the game value given to the player is greater than in the case where a prize is won in the first starting port 33a is set.

Further, among the three variable type counters CS1 to CS3, the variable type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 198", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, "198"), "0". The variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "240") by adding 1 in order within the range of "0 to 240", for example. The variable type counter CS3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 162", reach the maximum value (that is, "162"), and then return to "0". In the following description, the variation type counter CS1 will be appropriately referred to as a “first variation type counter”, the variation type counter CS2 may be referred to as a “second variation type counter”, and the variation type counter CS3 may be appropriately referred to as a “third variation type counter”. ..

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and the type of complete deviation. .. Here, for example, it is assumed that the first stop pattern selection counter C3a has a value indicating "stop pattern 1" (that is, a value indicating a front-back deviation reach fluctuation pattern group), and is the first among the front-back deviation reach fluctuation pattern groups. 1 It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach group (consisting of a plurality of different types of normal reach) is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Subsequently, one further variation pattern from the variation pattern group thus determined by the first variation type counter CS1 is determined by the second variation type counter CS2. Here, for example, it is assumed that one type of normal reach from the normal reach group is determined by the second variable type counter CS2. It should be noted that a plurality of different types of normal reach are realized by giving a difference such as a difference in the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs. Can be mentioned.

Further, subsequently, the third variation type counter CS3 determines which time the variation time addition is set in the one variation pattern determined by the second variation type counter CS2 in this way. For example, as this addition time, when the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, the decorative symbol of the intermediate decorative symbol row slides after that. The additional time, which is the time until the stop display is displayed, can be mentioned. In this way, more detailed decorative symbol variation modes can be determined by the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. That is, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation patterns.

The symbol variation mode can be determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, the symbol variation mode can be determined only by the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, or the symbol variation mode can be determined only by the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode in combination with the above, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination with the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol.

The variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, since the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40, the first reserved ball storage area or the second reserved ball storage area or the second reserved ball is stored. It is not necessary to save it in the area, it is sufficient to sequentially update and store it in the counter buffer.

The size and range of each of the above-mentioned counters are merely examples and can be arbitrarily changed. However, the sizes of the first jackpot random number counter C1a, the second jackpot random number counter C1b, the first stop pattern selection counter C3a, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are all different prime numbers, and in any case. It is desirable to set the value so that it is not synchronized. Further, the counter values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b may be different values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of "0" to "250", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), the counter returns to "0". The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later), and is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right second start port 34.

The number of hit values of the second symbol random number counter C4, that is, the number of random number values per second symbol is set in two types, a low probability time (normal time) and a high probability time. The number of random number values per second symbol at low probability is 5, and the values are "50, 101, 150, 2011, 250". The number of random number values per second symbol at high probability is 200, and the values are "0" to "199".

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later. , It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later in this embodiment), and the second RAM 503 is set at the timing when the game ball passes through the second starting port 34. 2 Stored in the symbol hold storage area.

That is, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol holding storage area, which is an area different from the first reserved ball storage area and the second reserved ball storage area, and has one execution area for the second symbol and four second symbols. A second symbol holding storage area consisting of a holding area for two symbols (holding first to fourth areas for the second symbol) is provided, and each of these areas is used to play a game to the second starting port 34. Each value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order according to the winning history of the ball.

Further, the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 is updated once every time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. 12, which will be described later, is executed once, and the value thereof is the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol of the counter buffer. The second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5, which was updated and acquired in the buffer and was updated and acquired in the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol buffer when the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball storage area, is also the second symbol. It is stored in the hold ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is unsuccessful, "x" is drawn based on the value of the second symbol off symbol counter C5 in the second symbol holding ball storage area. The display unit 41b is lit and displayed. It should be noted that the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol off symbol counter C5. That is, if the second symbol random number counter C4 is won, the display unit 41a on which "○" is drawn is lit and displayed, and if it is lost, the display unit 41b on which "x" is drawn is lit and displayed.

As described above, since the second symbol lottery has a high probability during the probability change state or the time saving state, it is easy to win the second symbol lottery. Further, when the second symbol lottery is won, the opening frequency of the first starting port 33b is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and the opening time of the first starting port 33b is also longer than in the normal gaming state. Moreover, if the game ball enters the first starting port 33b, the rate per 15R is 100%. Therefore, the player performs a right-handed game aiming at the first starting port 33b during the probability change state or the time saving state. On the other hand, after the end of the probability change state or the time saving state, it is difficult to win the second symbol lottery, and even if the second symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the first starting port 33b is compared with that in the probability change state. Due to its short length, it is extremely difficult to enter the first starting port 33b. Therefore, the player performs a left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 33a after the end of the probability change state or the time saving state. Further, if the left-handed game is performed, it can be expected that the general winning opening 31a will be won, so that the player plays the left-handed game after the probability change state ends.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 21. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a signal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 15, first, in step S601, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S602, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“738” in the present embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Initial value The second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the following step S603, the first and second jackpot random number counters C1a and C1b, the first and second jackpot symbol counters C2a and C2b, and the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b Perform an update of. Specifically, the first and second jackpot random number counters C1a and C1b, the first and second jackpot symbol counters C2a and C2b, and the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b are incremented by 1 and their respective. When the counter value reaches the maximum value (“738”, “4”, “250”, respectively in the present embodiment) and then increments by 1, the counter value is cleared to “0”, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1a to C3a and C1b to C3b are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

After that, as shown in FIG. 15, in step S604, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting ports 33a and 33b is executed. Explaining this start winning process with the flowchart of FIG. 16, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start ports 33a and 33b based on the detection information of the operation port switch. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting ports 33a and 33b, in the following step S702, in the case of winning the first starting port 33a, the first starting port of the first symbol display device 40 It is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N1 for 33a is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Further, in the case of winning a prize in the first starting port 33b, is the number of operation-holding balls N2 for the first starting port 33b of the first symbol display device 40 less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment)? Determine if not. The first starting ports 33a and 33b have been won, and the number of operation-holding balls N1 <4 of the first starting port 33a that has won the prize, or the second starting port 33b that has won the prize. On the condition that the number of operation-holding balls N2 <4 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S703, and the number of operation-holding balls N1 and N2 of the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b that have won the prize is incremented by one.

Further, in the following step S704, a random number related to the winning of the first symbol is acquired. Specifically, in the case of winning the first start port 33a, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1a, the first jackpot symbol counter C2a, and the first stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S603 are shown in FIG. It is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in 1. Further, in the case of winning the first start port 33b, the values of the second jackpot random number counter C1b, the second jackpot symbol counter C2b, and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b updated in step S603 are shown in FIG. It is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the second reserved ball storage area of the shown RAM 503. Further, in the case of winning a prize in the second starting port 33b, the values of the second jackpot random number counter C1b, the second jackpot symbol counter C2b, and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b updated in step S603 are shown in FIG. It is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the second reserved ball storage area of the shown RAM 503. As described above, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses a function of acquiring a random number related to the winning of the first symbol in step S704 to draw a lottery as to whether or not a special gaming state is generated based on the establishment of the starting condition. That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 includes a lottery unit corresponding to the lottery means of the present invention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the subsequent step S605, the launch control process is executed. Specifically, in the launch control process, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control when the launch permission signal S7 from the launch control device 312 is ON, as shown in FIG. The signal S9 is output to the launch control device 312, and the game ball launch control is performed by the launch device 229. After performing the firing control process in this way, the CPU 501 temporarily ends the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process of FIG. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 17 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main control device 261. Power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main control device 261 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 17, in step S801, the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, the power failure occurrence information is flagged and stored in the backup area.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting process accompanying the power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Further, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for the control devices on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state, for example, for about 1 second. To execute. In the following step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 permits RAM access.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON), and if it is off, proceeds to step S105 and turns it on. If there is, the process proceeds to step S114. In the following step S105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power failure occurrence information flag is set). Further, in step S106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 matches the RAM determination value with the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S114 or the like). Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the RAM 503 is initialized (step). S114 etc.). That is, in step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the used area of the RAM 503 to "0" and executes the initialization process of the RAM 503.

In the following step S115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout initialization command. As described above, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

Further, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command at the time of turning on the power to the sub control board 262a. This command at the time of turning on the power includes a command for determining the model of the pachinko machine, and the model can be determined based on the command content on the sub side such as the sub control board 262a or the display control device 45. You can do it.

Further, in step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit).

Further, in step S118, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the movable pattern stored in the ROM 502 and drives the distribution movable valve 409 so that the distribution movable valve 409 is driven according to the read movable pattern. Give instructions to the solenoid. The movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 will be described later, but the distribution movable valve 409 is set to be driven at a fixed cycle. The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a function of driving the distribution movable valve 409 according to the movable pattern. That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 includes a distribution operation control unit corresponding to the distribution operation control means of the present invention.

In step S119, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt enable and shifts to a normal process (see FIG. 12) described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the power is restored on condition that the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Execute the process (process at the time of power failure recovery). That is, in step S108, the power failure occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Although the details will be described later, when the payout control device 311 receives the payout return command from the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 returns and starts the payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command for causing the control device on the sub side to be duplicated in the gaming state when the power is turned off, and in step S111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is CTC (Counter). / Timer Circuit) Initial setting is executed. In step S112, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 drives the distribution movable valve 409 described above at a constant cycle. Further, in step S113, interrupt permission is set, and then the process proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later. For example, even if the power is cut off during the normal processing, the power is turned off after the last step of the normal processing (the step of "RAM access prohibited" shown in FIG. 12) is executed. Will be executed from step S201, which is the first step of normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S210 and S211 are executed in the remaining time.

In FIG. 12, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as a command updated in the previous process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information, and if there is prize detection information, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Further, since the decorative symbol (third symbol) is also variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 42 in conjunction with the first symbol variation display (variation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b) of the first symbol display device 40. However, when displaying the variation of the first symbol of the first symbol display device 40, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a total stop command (confirmation command), and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262 in the external output processing.

In this pachinko machine 10, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, the external output of normal processing is performed in the order of fluctuation pattern specification command → effect command (command for specifying change of fluctuation time, etc.) → decorative symbol specification command. A predetermined number of commands (for example, three) are sent each time processing is performed (that is, three commands are sent every 4 msec), and all stop commands are sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, after the fluctuation of the first symbol starts, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of each external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → → effect command → decorative symbol designation command (that is, 3 every 4 msec). The command may be sent one by one, and the all stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to display and execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

The decorative symbol designation command is a command for designating whether the variable display effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42 is a normal jackpot, a time-saving jackpot, a probabilistic jackpot, or a miss. .. The decorative symbol designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so that the display result of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is the result corresponding to the transmitted decorative symbol designation command.

The all stop command is a command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The all stop command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to stop and display the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted all-stop command.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a fluctuation pattern designation command and an effect command (command for designating a change of the fluctuation time, etc.) to the sub control device 262 in the external output process (step S201) of the normal process. May be sent. That is, it is determined which time the fluctuation time addition (addition time due to the sliding effect of the decorative symbol described above) is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3, and such addition time is appropriately set in the sub control device 262. Directing commands are used to instruct. Therefore, after the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol, a predetermined number (for example, three) of each external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → the effect command → the decorative symbol designation command (that is, three every 4 msec). A command is sent (by each), and a full stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the update of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment) and then incremented by 1, they are "0". Clear to. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area shown in FIG. 10 of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203 of FIG. 12, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower plate full tank signal received from the payout control device 311. After that, in step S204, the first symbol variation process for displaying the variation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is executed. By this first symbol variation processing, a jackpot determination and a setting of a variation pattern of the first symbol are performed. However, the details of the first symbol variation processing will be described later.

After that, in step S205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a large winning opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the case of a big hit state. That is, the large winning opening 32a is opened in each round of the big hit state, and in each round, whether the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 32a has elapsed or whether the specified number of game balls have won in the large winning opening 32a is determined. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening of the large winning opening 32a in that round is stopped and closed, and if there is a remaining round, the opening of the large winning opening 32a is repeatedly executed for the remaining number of rounds.

Further, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. Briefly, on condition that the game ball has passed through the second starting port 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and the display units 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41 display. The variation display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, when the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 and the second symbol is in the winning state, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is set to the first lower side as shown in step S207. The opening process of the first starting port 33b is performed by opening the starting port 33b for a predetermined time. In the normal gaming state, the first starting port 33b is opened for, for example, 1.0 second. In the case of a probability change state or a time saving state, the first starting port 33b is opened for, for example, 3.0 seconds. Although the description is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 15, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. ing.

Further, in step S208, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power-off occurrence information flag is set). If the power-off occurrence information is not set, the process proceeds to step S209, and if the power-off occurrence information is set, the process proceeds to step S212.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated. Execute (steps S210 and S211). That is, in step S210, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, when the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are each incremented by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“738” in the present embodiment) and then incremented by 1. Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503, respectively. Similarly, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in the present embodiment) and then incremented by 1. To do. Then, the updated value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Further, in step S211, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and the counter values are incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value (“198”, “240”, “162” in the present embodiment). Clear each to "0". Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial value Value The second symbol random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be updated at random.

Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is set in step S208 and the process proceeds to step S212, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt disable. Subsequently, in step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power supply has been quickly cut off to another control device. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the output of the control signal. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value and stores it in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Next, the first symbol variation process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 13, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. The jackpot includes a special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot and a predetermined time after the end of the special game. In the following step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is in progress. Then, when neither the jackpot nor the fluctuation display of the first symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S403, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the number of operation-holding balls N2 for the first starting port 33b of the first symbol display device 40. Is greater than "0", the process proceeds to step S404 if the number of operation-holding balls N2 is larger than "0", and step S403a if the number of operation-holding balls N2 is "0". Proceed to. At this time, if the jackpot is on, or if the number of operation-holding balls N2 is "0" and the number of operation-holding balls N1 is also "0", this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if neither of the jackpots nor the fluctuation display of the first symbol is displayed and the number of pending balls N2> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts "1" from the number of operation-holding balls N2. In step S405, a process of shifting the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the second hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area.

Further, if neither the jackpot state nor the fluctuation display of the first symbol is displayed and the number of pending balls N2 = 0, the process proceeds to step S403a, and it is determined in this step S403a that the number of pending balls N1> 0. , Step S404a. In step S404a, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts "1" from the number of operation-holding balls N1. In step S405a, a process of shifting the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area.

After that, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the fluctuation start process. Here, the fluctuation start process will be described in detail using the flowchart of FIG. 14. In step S501, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area when step S405 is passed. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the second jackpot random number counter C1b. When step S405a is passed, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1a stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not it is a jackpot is the relationship between the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the mode at that time (whether it is a probabilistic state or a normal state) for the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Is determined based on. The execution area of the second reserved ball storage area is determined based on the relationship between the value of the second jackpot random number counter C1b and the mode at that time (whether it is in the probabilistic state or the normal state). As described above, "350,700" among the numerical values "0" to "738" of the first and second big hit random number counters C1a and C1b are the hit values (2 pieces) at the normal low probability, and "50" at the high probability. , 101, 160, 209, 257, 310, 361, 418, 480, 517, 578, 635, 677, 730 "is the winning value (14 pieces). The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stores the hit values of the first big hit random number counter C1a and the second big hit random number counter C1b at the low probability time and the high probability time in the table for discrimination, respectively, and the game state is changed. Judgment is performed using the corresponding table each time it changes.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, in step S502, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area, that is, The blue lighting display of both LEDs 40a and 40b indicating the normal jackpot, which is displayed by the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40, or the combination lighting display of the blue lighting of the LED 40a indicating the time saving jackpot and the red lighting of the LED 40b. A stop symbol (stop display) is obtained, which is either a red lighting display of both LEDs 40a and 40b indicating the probability variation jackpot, or a combination lighting display of the red lighting of the LED 40 indicating the normal jackpot and the blue lighting of the LED 40b. That is, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a is obtained based on the table (not shown) showing the correspondence between the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a and the symbol.

Further, in step S502, in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the jackpot symbols corresponding to the values of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b stored in the execution area, that is, the two jackpot symbols of the first symbol display device 40. Both LEDs 40d, 40e indicating a normal jackpot, which are displayed by LEDs 40d, 40e, are lit in blue, or a combination lighting display of LED 40c indicating a time saving jackpot and LED 40d lit in red, or both LEDs 40d, 40e indicating a probability variation jackpot. The stop symbol (stop display) to be one of the red lighting displays of is obtained. That is, based on the table (not shown) showing the correspondence between the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b and the symbol, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b (“specific hit symbol” or “non-specific” Hit design ") is obtained.

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a fluctuation pattern (big hit fluctuation pattern) at the time of a jackpot. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 does not use the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b, and in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, the first jackpot symbol counter C2a of the execution area. And the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are confirmed in that order, and the fluctuation pattern is determined. In the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b in the execution area and the value of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked in that order, and the fluctuation pattern is determined. decide.

That is, whether the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is displayed by the normal jackpot "stop pattern 3" based on the values of the first and second jackpot symbol counters C2a and C2b, or on the third symbol display device 42. It is determined whether the decorative symbol of the above is displayed by the "stop pattern 4" of the time saving jackpot, or the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42 is displayed by the "stop pattern 5" of the probability variation jackpot. The types of the "stop pattern 3" to the "stop pattern 5" determined in this way are further determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1. That is, a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols such as a reach type of decorative symbols (third symbol) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the variation pattern group of the roughly decorative symbols determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (intermediate decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of a jackpot, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical values of the first and second jackpot symbol counters C2a and C2b and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the second The relationship between the numerical value of the variable type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a jackpot table or the like.

In addition, in the time saving state, the variation mode is different, such as the stop symbol time is shorter than in the other gaming states. Therefore, different tables are prepared according to the length of the stop symbol time and the like between the time saving state and the other gaming states. Therefore, when the time saving state is switched to, for example, the normal gaming state, the time saving state stop symbol time determination table is switched to the non-time saving state stop symbol time determination table.

In this way, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 displays on the third symbol display device 42 from among the variable display effects of a plurality of patterns that fluctuate the symbols based on the lottery result in the lottery unit in step S503 described above. It has a function to select a predetermined variable display effect. That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 includes a variable display effect selection unit corresponding to the variable display effect selection means of the present invention.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that the hit is not a big hit, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is out of symbol, that is, in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, 2 of the first symbol display device 40. The stop symbol is set so that the LEDs 40a and 40b stop and display in different colors. Further, in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the stop symbol is set so that the two LEDs 40d and 40e of the first symbol display device 40 stop and display in different colors.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a variation pattern (disengagement effect pattern) at the time of disconnection, and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the first stop pattern selection counter C3a and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. The values of the counters CS1 and CS2 are confirmed in that order, and the fluctuation pattern is determined. Further, in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the values of the second stop pattern selection counter C3b and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 are checked in that order. , Determine the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, the third is based on the value of the first stop pattern selection counter C3a, and in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, based on the value of the second stop pattern selection counter C3b. Final stop after the reach of the decorative symbol on the symbol display device 42 has occurred The "stop pattern 1", which is the "front-back off reach" in which the decorative symbol stops by shifting one before and after the reach decorative symbol, and after the same reach has occurred. The final stop pattern can be either "stop pattern 2", which is a "reach other than front / rear disengagement", and "stop pattern 0", which is a "complete disengagement" that does not cause reach. Decide if you want to. For example, when the determined stop pattern is, for example, "stop pattern 1" which is the front-rear out-of-reach reach, normal reach and super reach from the front-back out-of-reach change pattern group based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. For example, a variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) is specified is determined, and a rough variation pattern group of the decorative symbol is determined. Here, it is assumed that the normal reach is decided. Subsequently, one further variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the normal reach variation pattern group of the roughly decorative pattern determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (intermediate decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of deviation, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical values of the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the first 2. The relationship between the numerical value of the variable type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a table or the like for disengagement.

In the present embodiment, as one of the above-mentioned disengagement tables, for example, at a low probability, in the state of the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol. Some are adopted when the number of pending operations of the first symbol is "0", and there is no reach (complete) when the values of the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b are "0 to 201". (Out), “202 to 208” corresponds to the front and rear out reach, and “209 to 238” corresponds to the reach other than the front and rear out reach.

Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the effect time addition, that is, the determination of the addition of the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. Do. More specifically, based on the value of the variable type counter CS3, the decorative symbol (third symbol) in the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, resulting in an increase in the effect time (the intermediate decoration). A variation pattern is determined, including the increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbol in the symbol sequence to slip and appear to stop.

Further, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 issues a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in step S503, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the deviation fluctuation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

Subsequently, in step S508, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S502 and S503, it sets a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S502. Then, when steps S504 and S505 have been passed, a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the out-of-order symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S504 is set.

Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in step S506, and ends this process.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the fluctuation display of the first symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol has elapsed. To determine. The fluctuation time of the first symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the effect time addition determined as described above using FIG. 14, that is, the first symbol is determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the first symbol. The fluctuation time of is determined, and when the fluctuation time elapses, step S407 is positively determined. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the variation display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40. That is, the variable display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the variation display of the first symbol and sets the stop symbol of the first symbol to the display symbol. That is, when the normal jackpot is determined in step S502 of FIG. 14, after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a, 40b (or LEDs 40d, 40e) of the first symbol display device 40, both LEDs 40a, 40b (or) LEDs 40d, 40e) are lit in blue to indicate a normal jackpot. When the time saving jackpot is determined, after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40, the LED 40a (or LED 40d) is lit in blue and the LED 40b (or LED 40e) is lit in red. Shows a short jackpot. When the probability variation jackpot is determined, after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a, 40b (or LEDs 40d, 40e) of the first symbol display device 40, both LEDs 40a, 40b (or LEDs 40d, 40e) are lit in red. , Shows the probability variation jackpot. When the symbol is determined to be off in step S504 of FIG. 14, the LED 40a (or LED 40d) is lit in red after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a, 40b (or LEDs 40d, 40e) of the first symbol display device 40. At the same time, the LED 40b (or LED 40e) is lit in blue to indicate disengagement.

Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a total stop command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 42. After that, this process ends.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the stack address and the interrupt mode. Further, in step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the external interrupt vector.

After that, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 513. Further, in step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S906, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, that is, the backup is effective. Determine the sex. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initial setting of the RAM 513 at the time of power recovery. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 is the initial payout from the main control device 261. Upon receiving the conversion command, the RAM 513 is initially set at the time of power recovery in step S907. That is, the RAM area is initialized, and the control of the payout of the game ball is started.

Therefore, when the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control device 261 is initialized, and the payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311. Therefore, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261.

Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial setting of peripheral devices of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit), and the CTC is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the interrupt permission and shifts to the payout control process described later.

On the other hand, when the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S904, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S906, the payout control device 311 is similarly used. The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910), and performs the initialization process (step S911).

Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 19, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores a command from the main control device 261. Here, as the command to be stored, 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing the payout of 1 to 15 pieces) and the start of payout control to the payout control device 311 are instructed. There are 17 types of commands, including a payout return command for the purpose and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout initialization to the payout control device 311.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout return command or the prize ball command has been received. Further, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown) and executes the state return operation when it is determined that the state return operation has started.

After that, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and the lower plate is not full. , Execute the setting of the lower plate full tank release state.

Further, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the state without the tank ball or the state without the tank ball according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the setting of the state without a tank ball is executed when there is no tank ball, and when the state without a tank ball disappears, the state without a tank ball is released. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not there is a state of notifying, and if there is a state of notifying, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 notifies.

In steps S1007 to S1009, the prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the prize balls cannot be paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (both steps S1007 and S1008 are NO), the process proceeds to step S1009 and the prize ball control process ( FIG. 20), which will be described later, is started. If the prize balls cannot be paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to the ball rental process.

After that, in steps S101 to S1012, the ball lending process is executed. In this case, if the ball lending cannot be paid out and the ball lending request from the card unit is received (NO in step S1010 and YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 and the ball lending control process (described later). FIG. 21) is started. Further, if the ball lending is not payable or the ball lending request is not received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), the subsequent vibrator motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes control (vibe motor control) of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 7). After that, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. If a power failure occurs, the process proceeds to step S1015, otherwise the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the power-off occurrence information, and in step S1016, the RAM determination value is created. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 20, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out the prize balls. In the following step S1102, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game ball is normally counted. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1105, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, in the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 21, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out the ball lending. In the following step S1202, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1205, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, if the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of loaned balls (25) and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 due to the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 is started. The contents are as described with reference to FIG.

Next, the main process and the normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262.

First, in step S1301, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes the initial setting process accompanying the power-on. Specifically, port setting (port I / O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 millisecond interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (subcommand strobe interrupt) are performed. ..

Further, in step S1302, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power off processing is incomplete. Specifically, whether or not the various lamps (annular illumination unit 102, central illumination unit 103, etc.) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are all turned off and the speaker is in a mute state. Determine. Then, if the power off processing is not completed, the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1303.

Subsequently, in step S1303, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed, and if it is destroyed, the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. .. In step S1304, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a RAM area read / write check of the sub control device 262. Then, in step S1305, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if it is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 writes the data for the RAM destruction check for each area of the RAM 553, and sets the RAM destruction check data for determining that the data is destroyed if there is a read abnormality.

Then, in step S1307, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power is turned on after the power is turned off. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1308, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1308, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that causes a problem in the system when the data is cleared, and is an area of information that is desired to be retained except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, a subcommand reception buffer and power-on information can be mentioned. When the main control device 261 turns off the power and the sub control device 262 resets (when a power cut notification command is received from the main control device 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

In step S1309, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets interrupt enable. In step S1310, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the initial value of the RAM of the sub control device 262, and shifts to the normal process shown in FIG.

In step S1311, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 notifies the RAM abnormality and enters an infinite loop. For example, notification such as turning on a predetermined lamp unconditionally can be mentioned.

As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1401, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the normal process. If 1 ms or more has passed, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp output process. Specifically, the lamp output is performed according to the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S1403, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 gives a power-on notification. Specifically, a power-on command is used to notify for 30 seconds.

In step S1404, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, the title / still image is switched. That is, a so-called demo screen is displayed.

In step S1405, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the hold quantity display update process of the first symbol change. Specifically, since this hold quantity display update process is a process for displaying the hold lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 also in the third symbol display device 42, the first symbol display device 40 In the case of a pachinko machine that displays only with the hold lamp 40c, this process is not necessary.

In step S1406, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring / effect processing is for performing a model-specific effect by pressing the frame button 20 in a pachinko machine provided with a frame button 20 that can be pressed by the player. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that does not have such a frame button 20, this process is not necessary.

In step S1407, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp editing process. Specifically, the process of editing the lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronizing with) the variation pattern production of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is performed.

In step S1408, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs sound editing / output processing. Specifically, a process of sounding a sound corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation pattern production of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is performed.

In step S1409, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the liquid crystal effect execution management process. Specifically, time management or the like is performed to synchronize the lamp, the sound, and the liquid crystal effect (the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42).

In step S1410, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a process of updating the value of a random number for determining the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 and the effect of the voice lamp. Specifically, this random number takes a value of, for example, "0" to "32767", and returns to "0" when the upper limit value "37268" is reached.

In step S1411, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives a command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 performs a process corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 converts the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command and transmits the command to the display control device 45. The fluctuation pattern specification command may be output as it is. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the decoration special symbol designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the decoration special symbol designation command and the advance notice effect command to the display control device 45. As this notice command, for example, the presence or absence of the appearance of a school of fish as a notice can be mentioned. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the total stop command (confirmation command) from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the total stop command to the display control device 45 as it is.

In step S1412, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed. If the RAM is not destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if the RAM is destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

In the display control device 45, decoration to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 based on each command (variation pattern designation command, decoration special symbol designation command, notice effect command, all stop command) from the sub control device 262. The image generation control of the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is performed. Specifically, the display control device 45 executes an image generation process for the decorative symbol variation pattern in the third symbol display device 42, and generates, for example, an image at a frame rate of 30 (30 images per second). By storing those generated images in the video RAM 524 (for example, a frame buffer) and appropriately displaying them on the third symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol variation display on the third symbol display device 42 is realized. ing.

Next, the large winning opening opening / closing process performed by the main control device 261 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 261. As described above, the large winning opening opening / closing process (step S205) is also provided in the normal process shown in FIG. 12 by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261.

In step S1451, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first and second jackpot random number counters C1a and C1b are hit. The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 proceeds to step 1452 if it is a hit, and ends this process if it is not.

In step S1452, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits an opening command for executing an opening effect notifying the start of the jackpot round game to the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S1453.

In step S1453, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the large winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the door member 32b in order to open the door member 32b of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, and also performs a timer function. Use to start timing the opening time. Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a round number designation command notifying the number of rounds of the jackpot round to be started to the sub control device 262.

In step S1454, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 detects whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been won in the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32, and the timing of the opening time is the maximum opening time. It detects whether (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, and when a predetermined number of game balls are won in the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32, or when the opening time is counted up, the maximum opening time is set. If it has passed, the process proceeds to step S1455. If a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have not yet been won in the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32, or if the timing of the opening time has not passed the maximum opening time, the process returns to step S1454.

In step S1455, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the large winning opening solenoid so as to close the door member 32b of the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32, stops the timing of the opening time, and stops the timing of the opening time. Proceed to.

In step S1456, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the big winning opening solenoid so that the big winning opening solenoid remains closed for a predetermined interval time of the corresponding round.

After that, in step S1457, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not there is a next round, returns to step S1453 if there is a next round, and proceeds to step S1458 if there is no next round.

In step S1458, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits an ending command for executing an ending effect notifying the end of the jackpot round game to the sub control device 262, and ends this process.

Next, the movable pattern suggestion effect performed by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the liquid crystal effect execution management process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a music start timing adjustment process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the game processing during the round by the sub control device 262.

(LCD production execution management process)
In step S1501, as shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process. In step S1502, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the variation display mode setting process.

(Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process)
In step S1601, as shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S1602 if it receives the opening command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S1452, otherwise it proceeds to step S1602. Proceed to S1605.

In step S1602, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display opening command and proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the music start timing adjustment process.

In step S1604, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display jackpot effect command at the start timing of the music adjusted by step S1603. The display jackpot effect command is a command for selecting a predetermined jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 from among a plurality of patterns of jackpot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. Is. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 includes a display effect control unit (a function of executing the process of step S1604).

In step S1605, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 specifies that the jackpot round to be started from now on is the first round based on the round number designation command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S1453. A round number display command for displaying the image of "1R" on the third symbol display device 42 is set.

In step S1606, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S1607 if it has received the ending command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 of step S1458, and proceeds to step S1608 otherwise.

In step S1606, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display ending command and ends this process.

In step S1608, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the game processing during the round, which will be described later.

(Music start timing adjustment process)
The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 is an effect including the display of the operation request image requesting the operation of the second frame button 21, and the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position at the timing when the operation request image is displayed. It is controlled so that the movable pattern suggestion effect according to the timing is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has a function of performing a movable pattern suggestion effect (a function of executing the processes of steps S1701 to S1713 described later). That is, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 includes an operation effect control unit.

In step S1701, as shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 analyzes the content of the opening command and determines whether or not the number of rounds in the jackpot state is 16. When the number of rounds is 16, since the movable pattern suggestion effect is performed, it may be necessary to perform the music start timing adjustment process. Therefore, when the number of rounds is 16, the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not 16, since the movable pattern suggestion effect is basically not performed as described below, it is not necessary to perform the music start timing adjustment process. Therefore, if the number of rounds is not 16, this process ends.

The reason why the music start timing adjustment process is not performed when the number of rounds is not 16 is sufficient, for example, when the game ball is not held by the holding device 400 in the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, or to execute the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect. This is because it may not be possible to secure time. Even in a jackpot state with a small number of rounds, the game ball may be held by the holding device 400. In this case, if the movable pattern suggestion effect is not started, the player may not be attracted to the holding device 400. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot state with a small number of rounds, the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed during the variable display effect such as the reach effect, as will be described later in the second embodiment.

In step S1702, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) taken from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the opening command, and stores the storage area p of the RAM 553. To memorize. In order to acquire this delay time, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 is provided with a counting function that counts in synchronization with the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409.

In step S1703, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 analyzes the received opening command and stores the time required for the opening effect in the storage area q of the RAM 553. In step S1704, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores in the storage area r of the RAM 553 the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area p and the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q. .. The total time stored in the storage area r corresponds to the time from the start time of one movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the time when the door member 32b first starts opening after the opening effect is completed.

In step S1705, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area r is larger than 15 seconds, which corresponds to half the period of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409, and determines whether the total time is 15 seconds. If it is larger than, the process proceeds to step S1706, and if the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area r coincides with 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1707, and if it is not equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1711.

In step S1707, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the music A after the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q has elapsed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music A after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the music A.

In step S1708, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1709 if the total time stored in the storage area r is greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds, and proceeds to step S1711 otherwise.

In step S1709, the storage area s stores the time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area r from 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. In step S1710, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the music A after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music A after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the music A.

In step S1711, if the total time stored in the storage area r is greater than 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, the following calculation is performed and stored in the storage area s.
s = 15 seconds- (total time stored in storage area r-30 seconds)
Note that 15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

In step S1713, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the music B after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music B after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the music B.

In step S1714, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area r is equal to 15 seconds, which corresponds to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1715, and if the total time is shorter than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1716.

In step S1715, the image and sound of the music B are started after the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q has elapsed. In step S1716, the storage area s stores the time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area r from 15 seconds, which corresponds to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. In step S1717, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the music B after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music A after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the music B.

In this way, if the music A or the music B cannot be started from the start timing of the movable cycle (r = 30 seconds) or the half cycle timing of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 (r = 15 seconds), the opening effect is produced. By starting the music A or the music B after the time stored in the storage area s has elapsed from the end time, the start timing of the music A or the music B and the start timing or the half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 can be set. You can match the timing. As a result, it is possible to execute the movable pattern suggestion effect in which the rhythm of the music A or the music B and the movement timing of the distribution movable valve 409 are matched.

(Game processing during the round)
Next, the game processing during the round will be described.

In step S1751, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 analyzes the content of the round number designation command sent from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and determines whether or not the second and subsequent rounds designation commands have been received. .. If the round number designation command is a command for the second and subsequent rounds, the process proceeds to step S1752, for example, a round number display command for displaying the image of "2R" for designating the second round on the third symbol display device 42. set. If the command for specifying the number of rounds after the second round has not been received, this process ends.

In step S1753, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the process during the movable pattern suggestion effect that is executed during the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the process during the movable pattern suggestion effect, for example, when the second frame button 21 is operated in accordance with the suggestion timing during the movable pattern suggestion effect, if the timing is correct, an image indicating that the timing is correct is displayed. Display or output the correct sound. If the timing is not correct, an image indicating that the timing is not correct is displayed or an erroneous sound is output.

In step S1754, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not a round end command has been received from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. If the round end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1755, and the display of the number of rounds is deleted. If the round end command has not been received, this process ends.

Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 in the jackpot state and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 30 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 in the jackpot state. FIG. 31 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3 in the jackpot state. FIG. 32 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 4 in the jackpot state.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 1 in the jackpot state)
The movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is a movable pattern A which is started from the power-on of the game machine and is executed in 15 seconds, and a movable pattern B which is executed in the subsequent 15 seconds. Is a continuous pattern of 30 seconds per cycle. In the following, one cycle is referred to as a movable cycle. Specifically, the movable pattern A has 2 seconds (t1), 4 seconds (t2), 7 seconds (t3), 10 seconds (t4), and 11 seconds (t5) after the start of each movable cycle. After 13 seconds (t6), the distribution movable valve 409 shifts from the retracting position to the protruding position, maintains the protruding position for about 0.3 seconds, and then shifts from the protruding position to the retracting position. The movable pattern B is 16 seconds (t7), 20 seconds (t8), 21 seconds (t9), 22 seconds (t10), 26 seconds (t11), and 29 seconds (t12) after the start. The distribution movable valve 409 shifts from the retracting position to the protruding position, maintains the protruding position for about 0.3 seconds, and then shifts from the protruding position to the retracting position. In the following, t1 to t12 will be referred to as movable timings t1 to t12.

Here, at a certain time in the gaming state, ball entry detection to the first starting ports 33a and 33b occurs, and the lottery result based on this ball entry detection is the result of 16 rounds of jackpot state, and the variable display time is It is assumed that the jackpot opening time is 60 seconds and the jackpot opening time from the end of the fluctuation to the start of the jackpot state is 5 seconds.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable timing t6, and ends 60 seconds later at the same timing as the movable timing t6. After that, the jackpot opening effect is started, and 5 seconds later, the jackpot opening effect ends with a slight delay from the movable timing t7. After the jackpot opening production is completed, the jackpot 32a is opened and the first round of the jackpot state is started.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the jackpot effect image composed of the image of the music and the music of the music output from the speaker on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. In the jackpot effect image, two types of music A and music B are set, which take about 3 to 4 minutes from the start to the end of the music in the case of a 16-round jackpot state.

The movable pattern suggestion effect is set so that the movable pattern suggestion effect is started 90 seconds after the start of the music A in the 16-round jackpot effect image (that is, the video and music of the music A). The reason is that the movable pattern suggestion effect is started after the maximum number of reserved game balls (5 balls) is held in the distribution device 400. Specifically, assuming that the game ball launcher 38 fires one game ball per second, and if the player continuously fires the game ball immediately after the start of the jackpot state, the shortest is 75 seconds. Later, the holding device 400 reaches the maximum number of holdings. As described above, the distribution device 400 holds one out of every 15 game balls fired toward the grand prize opening 32a. Therefore, the movable pattern suggestion effect is set to start at least 75 seconds or more after the start of the jackpot state.

Here, the timing of the end of the jackpot opening time is in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, in the middle of the movable pattern B. In this case, if the music A or the music B is started immediately after the jackpot opening time elapses, the suggestion timing in the movable pattern suggestion effect described later included in the music A or the music B does not match the movable timing in each movable pattern. Therefore, the start timing of the music A or the music B is adjusted so that the start timing of the music A or the music B and the start timing of the movable pattern match.

The adjustment of the start timing of the music A or the music B is the time (hereinafter referred to as the delay time) p from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle to the reception time of the opening command from the time of the movable cycle of 30 seconds. The time s obtained by subtracting the total time r from the opening effect time q (hereinafter referred to as the adjustment time s) and the start timing of the music A are delayed. Specifically, after performing an effect of delaying the start timing of the music A (hereinafter referred to as an adjustment effect) for 12 seconds (s time) obtained by subtracting 18 seconds (total time r) from the movable cycle time of 30 seconds. The music A is started at the start timing of the movable pattern A.

During this adjustment time s, a display effect is performed so that the player does not get bored. For example, a video introducing a singer who sings music A, a digest video of a short summary of music A, and the like. The video ends at the elapsed timing of the adjustment time s. A plurality of types of images may be prepared according to the adjustment time s. Such images are also included in the jackpot production.

In this way, when the original display start timing of the jackpot effect image (that is, the image and music of the music A) is the timing in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, the timing in the middle of the movable pattern B, the start timing of the music A is set. By performing the effect of delaying the adjustment time s, the timing at which the music A is actually started coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestion effect started 90 seconds after the start of the jackpot effect by the music A, the movable timing constituting the movable pattern A and the suggested timing in which the operation request image suggesting the movable timing is displayed match. To do.

The movable pattern suggestion effect executed in the music A is a rhythm game in which the player hits the second frame button 21 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A in the middle of the music A. Therefore, the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is set so that at least a part thereof matches a part of the rhythm of any one of the music A. Specifically, the five movable timings of t2 to t6 in the movable pattern A coincide with a part of the rhythm of the music A. That is, the suggestion timing st1 to the suggestion timing st5 associated with the movable timing t2 to the timing t6 are preset in the jackpot effect by the music A.

Each suggested timing is set slightly earlier than the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409. Each suggestion timing is set based on the time until the game ball discharged from the holding portion 403 reaches the distribution movable valve 409 in the state where the holding state switching piece 405 is switched to the discharging position. Each suggestion timing and its setting method will be described in detail later.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 2 in the jackpot state)
Next, as shown in FIG. 30, the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable timing t6 as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, but the variable display time is the movable pattern suggestion effect example. It is assumed that the time is 72 seconds, which is 12 seconds longer than 1 (60 seconds). That is, the variation display of the symbol ends at a timing delayed by 3 seconds from the movable timing t10. Since the jackpot opening effect is assumed to be 5 seconds as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, the end time of the jackpot opening effect coincides with the end timing of the movable cycle.

In this case, if the music A is started at the start of the jackpot state, 90 seconds after the start of the music A in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is started, the adjustment effect for delaying the start timing of the music A is not performed. , The movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A and the suggested timings st1 to st5 coincide with each other.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 3 in the jackpot state)
Next, as shown in FIG. 31, the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable timing t6 as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, but the variable display time is the movable pattern suggestion effect example. It is assumed that the time is 51 seconds, which is 9 seconds shorter than 1 (60 seconds). That is, the variation display of the symbol ends at the same timing as the movable timing t2 4 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. Since the jackpot opening effect is assumed to be 5 seconds as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, the jackpot opening effect is in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, in the middle of the movable pattern A. Therefore, in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3, the adjustment effect is displayed prior to the start of the music, as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1.

Specifically, the adjustment time s (9 seconds) obtained by subtracting the total time r (9 seconds) of the delay time p (4 seconds) and the opening effect time q (5 seconds) from the time 15 seconds corresponding to the half cycle of the movable cycle. After performing the adjustment effect for 6 seconds), the music B is started at the start timing of the movable pattern B.

The movable pattern suggestion effect executed in the music B is an operation effect in which the player hits the second frame button 21 in the middle of the music B in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. Therefore, the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is set so that at least a part thereof matches a part of the rhythm of any of the music B. Specifically, the five movable timings t8 to t12 of the movable pattern B coincide with a part of the rhythm of the music B. That is, the suggestion timing st6 to the suggestion timing st10 associated with the movable timing t8 to the timing t12 are preset in the jackpot effect by the music B.

By starting the movable pattern suggestion effect 90 seconds after the start of the music B, the movable timings t7 to t11 and the suggested timings st6 to st10 constituting the movable pattern B coincide with each other. The suggestion timings st6 to st10 and the setting method thereof are the same as those in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 4 in the jackpot state)
Next, as shown in FIG. 32, the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable timing t6 as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, but the variable display time is the movable pattern suggestion effect example. It is assumed that 55 seconds is 5 seconds shorter than 1 (60 seconds). That is, the variable display of the symbol ends at the same timing as the movable timing t4. Since the jackpot opening effect is assumed to be 5 seconds as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, the end time of the jackpot opening effect coincides with the end timing of the movable pattern A.

In this case, if the music B is started at the start of the jackpot state, 90 seconds after the start of the music B at which the movable pattern suggestion production is started, without performing the adjustment effect of delaying the start timing of the music B. , The movable timings t7 to t11 constituting the movable pattern B and the suggested timings st6 to st10 coincide with each other.

Next, the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG. 33 is a timing chart showing the suggested timings st1 to st5 and an example of the operation timing of the second frame button 21. FIG. 34 is a timing chart following FIG. 33. FIG. 35 is a timing chart following FIG. 34. The suggested images (a) to (p) in FIGS. 32 (a) to 35 correspond to the images displayed during the movable pattern suggestion effect of (a) to (p) in FIGS. 36 to 39 described later. are doing.

Further, the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39. 36 (a) and 36 (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. 37 (c) and 37 (d) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 36. 38 (e) to 38 (j) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 37. 39 (k) to 39 (p) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 38.

In the movable pattern suggestion effect in Examples 1 and 2 of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timing t1 is not suggested, but the movable timings t2 to t6 are suggested. This is because, as shown in FIG. 33, an image for explaining the rhythm game in the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in the period until the suggestion timing corresponding to the movable timing t2.

As shown in FIG. 33, the third symbol display device 42 displays the movable pattern A at that time for 2.0 seconds from 0.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 2.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. The image (a) explaining the rhythm game is displayed so as to overlap the video of the music A or the music B. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), a character image "Please hit the drum button in rhythm of the rhythm game" is displayed. Further, the third symbol display device 42 displays a round number image 421 indicating that the jackpot state is in progress. Here, an image (9R) showing the ninth round is displayed. Although not particularly described in the following description, it is assumed that the image of the music A or the music B displayed at that time is displayed behind each image constituting the movable pattern suggestion effect.

Next, an image (b) notifying the start of the rhythm game is displayed for 1.0 second from 2.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 3.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36B, an operation explanation image 423 explaining the operation and an operation timing image 425 imitating the shape of the second frame button 21 (the shape of a drum) informing the operation timing are displayed. Will be done. In the operation explanation image 423, the explanation "When the Hit! Mark overlaps the drum, hit the drum button." Is displayed.

The rhythm game in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 is executed for 11.0 seconds from 3.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 14.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. For 0.85 seconds from 3.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 3.85 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the first operation request image 431 in which the characters "Hit!" Are displayed is the operation timing image. A moving image (c) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 37 (c)). An image (d) in which the first operation request image 431 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 for 0.50 seconds from 3.85 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 4.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A (hereinafter , Called an overlapping image) is displayed (see FIG. 37 (d)). After that, the first operation request image 431 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (e) disappearing from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 38 (e)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st1.

As shown in FIG. 34, the second operation in which the characters "Hit!" Are displayed for 0.95 seconds from 6.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 6.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. A moving image (f) in which the requested image 432 approaches the operation timing image 425 is displayed (see FIG. 38 (f)). An image (g) in which the second operation request image 432 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 is displayed for 0.4 seconds from 6.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 7.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. (See FIG. 38 (g)). After that, the second operation request image 432 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (h) disappearing from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 38 (h)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st2.

During 0.95 seconds from the start of the movable pattern A to 9.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the third operation request image 433 in which the characters "Hit!" Are displayed is an operation timing image. A moving image (i) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 38 (i)). In 0.4 seconds from the start of the movable pattern A 9.95 seconds to 10.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the third operation request image 433 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425, and "Hit! A moving image (j) in which the fourth operation request image 434 representing the characters “” approaches the operation timing image 425 is displayed (see FIG. 38 (j)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st3.

In addition, in FIG. 38 (j) and FIG. 39 (k) described later, since the ninth round is completed, the round number image 421 showing the ninth land is erased, and an interval time of 1.0 second is inserted. .. In FIGS. 39 (l) and later described later, since the tenth land is started, the round number image 421 is changed to "10R".

The third operation request image 433 moves away from the operation timing image 425 and disappears from the display screen in 0.6 seconds from 10.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 10.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. A moving image (k) in which the fourth operation request image 434 further approaches the operation timing image 425 is displayed (see FIG. 39 (k)). As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the fourth operation request image 434 is the operation timing image 425 during 0.4 seconds from 10.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 11.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. An image (l) that completely overlaps with is displayed (see FIG. 39 (l)). After that, the fourth operation request image 434 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (m) disappearing from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 29 (m)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st4.

The fifth operation request image 435 in which the characters "Hit!" Is displayed is the operation timing image in 0.95 seconds from 12.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 12.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. A moving image (n) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 39 (n)). An image (o) in which the fifth operation request image 435 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 is displayed for 0.5 seconds from 12.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 13.45 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. (See FIG. 39 (o)). After that, the fifth operation request image 435 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (p) disappearing from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 39 (p)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st5.

After 14.0 seconds from the start of the movable pattern A, both the fifth operation request image 435 and the operation timing image 425 disappear, and the image of the music A is displayed again. The above-mentioned rhythm game may be displayed overlaid on the image of the music A, or the image of the music A may be reduced and displayed in the corner of the display screen and the image of the rhythm game may be displayed in the center of the display screen. Good.

The image displayed during the movable pattern suggestion effect is not limited to the above-mentioned image. For example, an image showing the number of game balls held by the holding device 400 may be displayed. In that case, a sensor for counting the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 is attached to the main body component 401 of the game board 30 or the holding device 400, and the holding device 261 or the sub control device 262 is attached to the holding device. It is provided with a function of counting and displaying the number of game balls held in 400. Further, for example, the sub control device 262 is configured to be able to receive the pressing signal of the second frame button 21, so that when the second frame button 21 is operated during the display time of the overlapping image, the timing is correct. When the second frame button 21 is operated at a timing that is out of the display time of the overlapping image, such as displaying an image indicating that the sound is displayed (for example, an image of a note indicating the correct sound) or outputting the correct sound, the timing An image indicating that the sounds do not match (for example, an image in which a note indicating an incorrect sound is marked with a cross) may be displayed or an incorrect sound may be output.

Next, a method of setting the above-mentioned suggestion timings st1 to st5 (that is, display time of overlapping images) will be described again with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

The display time of the overlapping image is set in consideration of the response time of the second frame button 21, the operating time of the discharge blocking valve 406, the falling time of the game ball, the position of the distribution movable valve 409, and the like. For example, the distribution movable valve 409 performs the above-mentioned protruding operation and shunting operation from 0.0 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of each movable timing. At each movable timing, the time during which the distribution movable valve 409 can place the dropped game ball and be guided to the general winning opening 31b is from the timing when the tip of the distribution movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2 of the distribution movable valve 409. The time until the tip returns to the position P2, that is, 0.50 seconds from 0.20 seconds after the start of each movable timing to 0.70 seconds after the start of each movable timing.

The time from the timing when the player presses the second frame button 21 (for example, tm1A) to the timing when the discharge prevention valve 406 starts driving to the discharge position (for example, tm1B) is set to 0.10 seconds, and the discharge prevention valve 406 sets. Assuming that the time from the timing of starting the operation (for example, tm1B) to the timing of the game ball discharged from the holding portion 403 landing on the distribution movable valve 409 (for example, tm1C) is 0.25 seconds, the distribution movable valve 409 If the overlapping image (d) is displayed at least 0.35 seconds before the timing of protruding to the position P2 (that is, 0.15 seconds before the start of the movable timing), the player displays the overlapping image (d). Even if the second frame button 21 is pressed in accordance with the start timing tm1A, the game ball discharged from the holding portion 403 can be placed on the distribution movable valve 409 and guided to the general winning opening 31b. Therefore, the display start timing of the overlapping image at the suggested timings st2 to st6 is 0.35 seconds before the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2 at the movable timings t2 to t6 (that is, the start of each movable timing). It is set to 0.15 seconds ago).

Further, the display end timing of the overlapping images at the suggestion timings st2 to st6 is the time (0.10 seconds) from when the player presses the second frame button 21 until the discharge blocking valve 406 starts driving to the discharge position. ) And the time (0.25 seconds) from the start of operation of the discharge blocking valve 406 until the game ball discharged from the holding portion 403 lands on the distribution movable valve 409. The valve 409 is set 0.35 seconds before the timing of returning to the position P2 (that is, 0.35 seconds after the start of each movable timing at the movable timings t2 to t6). That is, the display time of the overlapping image is set to 0.50 seconds in accordance with the time during which the distribution movable valve 409 can place the dropped game ball and guide it to the general winning opening 31b.

In this way, by considering the response time of the second frame button 21, the operating time of the discharge blocking valve 406, the falling time of the game ball, the position of the distribution movable valve 409, etc., the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion effect Can be set at a predetermined time.

Next, when the second frame button 21 is operated at an arbitrary timing during the movable pattern suggestion effect (for example, the timing of tm1A to tm5A shown in FIGS. 33 to 35), the game ball ejected from the holding device 400. Explains whether or not the vehicle rides on the distribution movable valve 409 (that is, whether or not it is guided to the general winning opening 31b).

When the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm1A of the display start of the overlapping image, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is distributed at the same timing tm1C as the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2. It reaches the surface of the movable valve 409, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and wins a prize in the general winning opening 31b (see also FIGS. 42 and 43 described later).

When the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm2A 0.25 seconds after the start of displaying the overlapped image, the distribution movable valve 409 maintains the maximum protrusion position P3 for the game ball discharged from the holding device 400. At the timing tm2B during the period, the surface of the distribution movable valve 409 is reached, guided by the general winning opening 31b, and winning the general winning opening 31b. Further, even when the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm3A 0.35 seconds after the start of displaying the overlapped image, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is at a timing later than the above-mentioned timing tm2B. However, the distribution movable valve 409 reaches the surface of the distribution movable valve 409 at the timing tm3B while maintaining the maximum protrusion position P3, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and wins the general winning opening 31b. ..

Further, when the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm4A of the display end of the overlapping image, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 has the same timing as the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 returns from P3 to the position P2. It reaches the surface of the distribution movable valve 409 at tm4C, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and wins the general winning opening 31b. On the other hand, when the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm5A (timing after the display of the overlapping image ends) 0.55 seconds after the start of displaying the overlapping image, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400. Since the distribution movable valve 409 falls to the same height as the surface of the distribution movable valve 409 at the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 changes from the position P2 to the position P1, it is guided to the general winning opening 31b without riding on the distribution movable valve 409. It is discharged without being discharged (see also FIGS. 46 and 47 described later).

It is also conceivable that the player repeatedly hits the second frame button 21 aiming at the time when the overlapping images are displayed. In this case, only when the second frame button 21 can be repeatedly hit within the time when the overlapping image is displayed, the game ball dropped from the holding portion 403 is placed on the distribution movable valve 409 and placed on the general winning opening 31b. It may be possible to induce. Further, the pressing of the second frame button 21 may be valid only for the first time within the time when the overlapped image is displayed once.

Next, the lower right game area 30a3 of the game board during the execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a lower right game area 30a3 of the game board during the execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the big hit state. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing how the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 shown in FIG. 40 enters the general winning opening 31b. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG. 40. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG. 41. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a lower right gaming area 30a2 similar to FIG. 40. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing how the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 shown in FIG. 44 is not entered into the general winning opening 31b. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG. 44. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG. 45.

If the player can successfully hit the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggestion timing st1 to the suggestion timing st5, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is in the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 41 and 43. The distribution movable valve 409 can be placed on the distribution movable valve 409 to win a prize in the general winning opening 30b.

On the other hand, when the player hits the second frame button 42 at a timing deviating from the suggested timing st1 to the suggested timing st5, the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 is in the protruding position and the holding of the game ball are released. The timing does not match. Further, even when the second frame button 21 is operated while visually observing the distribution movable valve 409 regardless of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the distribution movable valve 409 operates at high speed and the visibility of the distribution movable valve 409 is improved. Since it is low, it is difficult to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the protruding position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, most of the game balls discharged from the distribution device 400 do not ride on the distribution movable valve 409, so that the balls do not enter the general winning opening 31b and are not entered into the general winning opening 31b. Flow down toward.

As described above, even if the game ball is normally held in the holding device 400, it is difficult for the player to put the game ball held in the holding device 400 into the general winning opening 31b, but the holding device is in the jackpot state. If the game ball is held at 400, the game ball held at the holding device 400 can be moved to the general winning opening 31b by successfully operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion effect. Can be entered into.

As a result, the maximum number of reserved game balls is held in the holding device 400 during the jackpot state, so that the general winning opening 31b, which normally cannot be won, has an opportunity to win a prize for the number of reserved game balls. , The player feels the merit that the maximum number of game balls held is held in the holding device 400. Further, even if the game ball is held in the holding device 400, it is usually difficult for the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 to win the general winning opening 31b, but the second frame button 21 participates in the movable pattern suggestion effect. If operated at an appropriate timing, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 can easily win a prize in the general winning opening 31b, so that the player also feels an advantage in participating in the movable pattern suggestion effect. Further, since the winning balls from the general winning opening 31b differ depending on the skill of the operation of the second frame button 42, it is possible to give technical intervention to the winning of the general winning opening 31b during the big hit state. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 provided with the holding device 400, which is rich in interest.

The first starting ports 33a and 33b correspond to the starting ball entry means of the present invention, the variable winning device 32 corresponds to the variable ball entry means of the present invention, and the ball entry detection switches 31c and 31d correspond to the entry of the present invention. Corresponds to the ball detecting means. The above-mentioned lottery unit (function of executing step S704 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) corresponds to the lottery means of the present invention. The above-mentioned holding device 400 corresponds to the holding device of the present invention, the above-mentioned general winning opening 31b corresponds to the above-mentioned winning opening, and the above-mentioned second frame button 21 corresponds to the operating means of the present invention. The above-mentioned shunting position and protruding position correspond to the first position and the second position of the present invention, and the above-mentioned distribution movable valve 409 corresponds to the distribution member of the present invention. The above-mentioned distribution operation control unit (function of executing steps S112 and S118 included in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) corresponds to the distribution operation control means of the present invention. The above-mentioned first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 correspond to the operation request of the present invention, and the above-mentioned third symbol display device 42 corresponds to the display means of the present invention. The above-mentioned movable pattern suggestion effect corresponds to the operation effect of the present invention, and the above-mentioned operation effect control unit (function of executing steps S1701 to S1713 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262) is used in the operation effect control means of the present invention. Equivalent to.

Further, the above-mentioned display effect control unit (function of executing the process of step S1604 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262) corresponds to the display effect control means of the present invention. The decorative plate 413 described above corresponds to a member that reduces the visibility of the distribution member of the present invention. The movable decorative piece 415 described above corresponds to a member on which a member that reduces the visibility of the distribution member of the present invention operates. The above-mentioned holding area light emitting unit 417 corresponds to the light emitting means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game board 30 having the game area 30a in which the game ball can flow down and the first start in which the game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter. The mouths 33a and 33b and the game ball that flows down the game area 30a when a right-handed game is performed are provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the game ball is in a closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter and a game ball is more than in the closed state. A variable winning device 32 that changes to an open state that facilitates ball entry, ball entry detection switches 31c and 31d that detect game balls that have entered the first starting ports 33a and 33b, and ball entry detection switches 31c and 31d. It is equipped with a lottery unit (a function of executing step S704 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) that can determine whether or not to generate a special game state based on the detection of a game ball, and the result of the lottery is a big hit result. In the case of, the variable winning device 32 executes the jackpot round game in which the variable winning device 32 changes to the open state and the closed state a plurality of times as the jackpot state. A holding device 400 that changes between a holding state in which some of the game balls fired toward the variable winning device 32 can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game balls is released, and a game area 30a. Of these, the general winning opening 31b, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the hold device 400, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball, and the hold device 400. The second frame button 21 that receives the operation of the player, including the operation of changing from the hold state to the release state, the first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win the general winning opening 31b, and the hold release. A distribution operation valve 409 that performs a distribution operation that changes to a second position that makes it easier to win a prize in the general winning opening 31b, and a distribution operation control that controls the distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409. This is an effect including the display of a unit (a function of executing steps S112 and S118 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) and the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 that request the operation of the second frame button 21. The suggested timings st1 to st5 and stst6 to st10 at which the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed are adjusted to the movable timings t2 to t6 and t8 to t12 at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. It includes an operation effect control unit (a function of executing steps S1701 to S1713 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262) that controls the display of the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state.

As a result, the player can display the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 at the timings st1 to st5 and stst6 to st10 in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. By operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the above, the holding device 400 can be changed from the holding state to the releasing state according to the timings t2 to t6 and tst8 to t12 when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. it can. As a result, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed wins a prize in the general winning opening 31b via the distribution movable valve 409 that comes to the protruding position. It becomes easier to do. On the other hand, even if the second frame button 21 is operated by the player other than this timing, the timing at which the holding device 400 changes from the holding state to the releasing state does not match the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 at this timing to win the general winning opening 31b. Therefore, the player actively fires the game ball during the jackpot state, actively participates in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state, and is in the movable pattern suggestion effect. If the second frame button 21 can be operated well at the timing when the operation request image is displayed, in addition to the game value that the player can enjoy based on the ball entering the variable winning device 32 during the jackpot state, it is held. As many game balls as the number of game balls held in the device 400 can be entered into the general winning opening 31b, and a predetermined game value corresponding to the number can be obtained during the jackpot state. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device 400 can be improved.

Further, the holding device 400 can hold a part of the game balls fired toward the variable winning device 32 in the jackpot state. As a result, the player can hold a part of the fired game balls in the holding device 400 by continuously firing the game balls toward the big winning opening 32a during the big hit state. In order to make the game ball held by the holding device 400 win a prize in a winning opening other than the large winning opening 32a, the second frame button is successfully displayed at the timing when the operation request image is displayed during the movable pattern suggestion production. Since it is necessary to operate 21, it is possible to give technical intervention to winning a prize in a general winning opening 31b other than the variable winning device 32 in the jackpot state.

The right-handed game is an operation of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the upper right narrow area 30a2 and the lower right game machine area 302c on the right side of the game area 30a when the game machine is viewed from the front. That is.

Further, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 as a part of a predetermined jackpot effect selected from the plurality of patterns of the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. To. As a result, the player has a chance (as a movable pattern suggestion effect) to obtain a predetermined game value during the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. It is possible to improve the interest in.

Further, since the operation effect control unit displays the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42 based on the elapse of 90 seconds from the start of the jackpot state, the holding device 400 has a sufficient number of game balls (5). (Ball) The player can participate in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the held state, and the interest of the game using the holding device 400 can be improved.

Further, the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position is multiple times during one movable pattern suggestion effect, and the first to fifth operations are performed according to the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position a plurality of times. Since the movable pattern suggestion effect in which the requested images 431 to 435 are displayed multiple times is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the player can match the timing when the first to fifth operation requested images 431 to 435 are displayed. It is necessary to operate the second frame button 21. As a result, the player can actively participate in the operation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42.

Further, the jackpot effect and the movable pattern suggestion effect are effects that accompany the reproduction of the music A or the music B, and the timings t2 to t6 of a part of the timings t1 to t12 when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. tst8 to t12 match the rhythm of a predetermined part (timing st1 to st5, stst6 to st10) of music A or music B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is the first to first in accordance with the rhythm of music A or music B. 5 The operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. As a result, the third symbol is entertained by the player by operating the second frame button 21 according to the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the music A or the music B. The player can actively participate in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the display device 42.

Further, the distribution movable valve 409 repeats the distribution operation at a constant movable cycle, but the second frame button 21 is operated by the player at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. The movable pattern suggestion effect is the first so that the timing when the game ball whose hold of the holding device 400 is released when the holding device 400 is released reaches the distribution movable valve 409 and the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position match. Since it is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 42, if the player operates the 2nd frame button 21 at the timing (timing st1 to st5, stst6 to st10) when the 1st to 5th operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. It is possible to realize a movable pattern suggestion effect that the timing at which the game ball for which the holding of the holding device 400 is released reaches the distribution movable valve 409 and the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position match.

The game ball discharged from the holding device 400 reaches the sorting movable valve 409 for a predetermined time (from the timing when the holding device 400 is released from the timing when the holding device 400 is released) rather than the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. Since the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed before the time until the timing of the operation: 0.35 seconds, for example, the player can display the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435. Even though the second frame button 21 is operated, the timing when the game ball whose hold of the holding device 400 is released reaches the distribution movable valve 409 and the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position do not match. You can avoid the inconvenience.

In addition, the operation effect control unit adjusts the start timing of the jackpot effect in the jackpot state. That is, the start timing of the jackpot effect is determined according to the timing of the establishment of the start condition based on the ball entry detection at the first start ports 33a and 33b, but (if there is a hold of the fluctuation display, it is held first. Although it is determined in consideration of the time until the end of the variable display, the distribution movable valve 409 repeats the distribution operation at a constant movable cycle, so a jackpot effect is simply produced according to the timing when the start condition is satisfied. When the second frame button 21 is operated by the player at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed, the holding device 400 is released from the holding. The timing of reaching the minute movable valve 409 and the timing of the distribution movable valve 409 coming to the protruding position may not match. Therefore, by adjusting the start timing of the jackpot effect in the jackpot state so that both timings match, the inconvenience that both timings do not match can be avoided.

Further, since the distribution movable valve 409 performs the distribution operation in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, even if the second frame button 21 is operated while visually observing the distribution movable valve 409, the distribution movable valve 409 It becomes difficult to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the siding position changes to the protruding position.

Further, in a mode in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the distribution movable valve 409 operates at a high speed (for example, the time from the shunting position to the shunting position via the protruding position is about 0.5 seconds). Because of this aspect, even a player who is accustomed to the operating speeds of other operating members will find it difficult to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 changes from the shunting position to the protruding position.

Further, the mode in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that the distribution movable valve 409 is visually recognized on the holding device 400 from the front side in the front view of the game machine and from the front side in the front view of the game machine. It is an embodiment in which the decorative plate 413 that reduces the ease is arranged. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the distribution movable valve 409 located behind the decorative plate 413 is in the shunting position or the protruding position. Therefore, the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 is in the protruding position and the holding of the game ball are released. It becomes difficult to match the timing of doing.

Further, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to see is the mode in which the movable decorative piece 415 that impairs the visibility is operated. Therefore, the sorting movable valve 409 located behind the movable decorative piece 415 is operated. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the seat is in the shunting position or the protruding position, it becomes difficult to match the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 is in the protruding position with the timing when the holding of the game ball is released.

Further, in a mode in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize, a holding area light emitting unit 417 that emits light from the back side of the distribution movable valve 409 is provided on the rear side of the holding device 400 when viewed from the front of the game machine. This is a mode in which the holding region light emitting unit 417 emits light. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the position of the distribution movable valve 409 is the shunting position or the protruding position due to the light emitted from the holding area light emitting unit 417 from the back side of the distribution movable valve 409, so that the distribution movable valve 409 protrudes. It becomes difficult to match the timing of the position with the timing of releasing the hold of the game ball.

In the first embodiment, the effect of suggesting the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 was performed during the jackpot state, but as described in the second embodiment, the effect of suggesting the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 is performed. , You may go during the game state other than the jackpot state.

Although all the game balls held in the holding device 400 can be discharged by the movable pattern suggestion effect in the jackpot state described in the first embodiment, the game is played in the holding device 400 again during the jackpot state after the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect. The ball may be put on hold. Further, in the first embodiment, the movable pattern suggestion effect is not executed in the jackpot state other than 16 rounds, but the game ball may be held by the holding device 400 even in the jackpot state of the number of rounds in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is not executed. is there. Further, when the time saving jackpot or the probability variation jackpot is won, the right-handed game is performed even in the time saving state or the probability variation state, so that the holding device 400 may hold the game.

That is, the holding device 400 is not only in the jackpot state, but also in the jackpot state after the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect, in the jackpot state other than 16 rounds, in the probability change state, in the time saving state, and the like. The game ball may be held during the state (right-handed game state). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the state is switched from the right-handed game state to the left-handed game state (left-handed game state) such as the normal game state, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

The differences between the holding device 400 of this embodiment and the holding device 400 of Example 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 57, the holding device 400 of this embodiment is provided with a microswitch 418 that detects whether or not the game ball is held in the holding portion 403. Specifically, the main body of the micro switch 418 is located on the back surface side of the game board 30 and is arranged at a downstream position of the holding portion 403, and the holding ball contact portion 418a in contact with the game ball is the back surface of the game board 30. It protrudes from the side to the front side. The convex piece of the holding ball contact portion 418a is located at a position where the game ball comes into contact with the game ball that is first held by the holding portion 403 in a state where the game ball is not held. In the state shown in FIG. 56, the holding ball contact portion 418a is pushed by the first held game ball, and it is detected that the game ball is held by the holding portion 403. In the state shown in FIG. 57, since the holding ball contact portion 418a is not pushed by the game ball, it is detected that the game ball is not held by the holding portion 403. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player by displaying the movable pattern suggestion effect in the state where the game ball is not held on the holding unit 403.

The means for detecting whether or not the game ball of the holding portion 403 is held is not limited to the micro switch 418, and the holding portion 403 may be sandwiched between a pair of photosensors having a floodlight and a receiver. Absent.

The timing of switching from the right-handed game state to the left-handed game state will be described. In this embodiment, the execution conditions of the movable pattern suggestion effect are different from those in the first embodiment, and the external and internal configurations of the game machine are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, in the following description, the above-mentioned FIGS. 56 and 57 will be referred to as appropriate.

(Switching timing example 1)
An example of the switching timing is, in the case of winning a normal jackpot, a time when the normal game state starts after the end of the jackpot state. That is, during the jackpot state, the right-handed game is performed aiming at the variable winning device 32, so that the game ball may be held by the holding device 400. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the jackpot state, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. As a result, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held during the jackpot state during the normal gaming state after the jackpot state ends.

In addition, when the normal game state is started after the end of the jackpot state, the player is not likely to win the jackpot state again in order to secure the game value acquired during the jackpot state. It is easy to lose the motivation to continue the game. However, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot state, and the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 by the movable pattern suggestion effect is increased. If you know that you have a chance to acquire a predetermined game value, you can motivate the game to continue the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot state. ..

(Switching timing example 2)
In another example of switching timing, if a probability change jackpot or a time saving jackpot is won, the next gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) starts after the probability change state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot state ends. It is the time when it is done. That is, the right-handed game is performed during the jackpot state, but the right-handed game is performed aiming at the first start port 33b even during the probability change state or the time saving state after the jackpot state ends, so that the game ball is played on the holding device 400. May be put on hold. For example, if a 2R jackpot with probability variation is won, it is difficult to hold the game balls in the holding device 400 up to the maximum number during the jackpot state of 2 rounds, but if the subsequent probability variation state is, for example, 100 fluctuation displays, the probability variation A maximum number of game balls can be held in the holding device 400 during the state. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the probability change state or the time saving state, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. As a result, the player can set a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held not only in the jackpot state but also in the probability change state or the time reduction state, and the normal game state after the end of the probability change state or the time reduction state. There is a possibility to get inside. Further, even in the normal game state after the end of the probability change state or the time saving state, it is possible to motivate the game to continue the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Switching timing example 3)
The above-mentioned example (Example 2) is not limited to the time when the probabilistic state or the time saving state is switched to the normal gaming state, but the probabilistic state or the time saving state which is highly advantageous to the player is switched to the probabilistic state or the time saving state which is less advantageous. It may be a time point. For example, during the probability change state or the time saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol lottery based on the detection of the ball entering the first starting port 33b is set to a high probability (as a result, the opening time of the first starting port 33b). If there is a period with support and a period without support, it is the time when the probability change state or time reduction state of the support period is switched to the probability change state or time reduction state of the period without support. .. A right-handed game is played during the probable change state or the time saving state during the period when the support is attached. When the probability change state or the time saving state during the period without support is started, it is difficult to expect the ball to enter the first start port 33b, so the left-handed game is aimed at the first start port 33a in the probability change state. Will be done. In this way, after the end of the probabilistic state or the time saving state of the support period, the movable pattern suggestion effect may be displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in the probabilistic state or the time saving state of the non-support period. .. Further, even if the support is not provided after the probable change state or the time saving state of the support is provided, it is possible to motivate the player to continue the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Next, a predetermined condition for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect in the left-handed game state switched from the right-handed game state will be described.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has a function (variation) of selecting a predetermined variation display effect from a plurality of patterns of variation display effects that change the symbol based on the lottery result of the first symbol in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. Display effect selection unit) is provided. In the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state, the variable display effect selection unit executes the movable pattern suggestion effect during the variable display effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the variable display effect.

(Example of condition 1 in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed)
An example of a predetermined reach effect in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed is that the variable display effect includes a predetermined reach effect and the display time of the reach effect is at least longer than the display time of the movable pattern suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to secure time for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Example 2 of the condition in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed)
Another example of a predetermined reach effect in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed is a super reach effect with a high degree of expectation that suggests a jackpot state rather than a normal reach effect. In the super reach effect, the display time of the reach effect is set to a longer time (60 seconds) than the time (15 seconds) in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the display time of the reach effect is long, the player tends to feel bored during the reach effect, but by executing the movable pattern suggestion effect during the reach effect, the player can set the display time of the reach effect. Can be entertained.

(Example of condition 3 in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed)
In another example of the predetermined reach effect in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed, in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state, the lottery result of the first symbol in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the right-handed game. This is a case where the variable display effect selected based on the lottery result of the first symbol performed after the disengagement result is a disengagement result that is not a state, and includes a super reach effect. In this case, the game ball held during the previous right-handed game state is not put into the right-handed game state by giving an opportunity to win the general winning opening 31b during the super reach production performed after the disappointment result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of being a disappointing result.

(Example 4 of conditions in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed)
In Example 4 described above, it may be a condition that the variable display effect based on the lottery result (disappearance result) of the first symbol includes a reach effect such as a super reach effect in which the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal reach. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the result is not a right-handed game even though the variable display effect including the super reach effect is executed.

Next, when the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed as a part of the variable display effect (for example, a part of the reach effect), the suggestion timing and the distribution movable valve 409 in the movable pattern suggestion effect are the same as in the first embodiment. It may not match the movable timing of. Therefore, in the following, the means for setting the variable display effect including the movable pattern suggestion effect in this embodiment will be described, and then the suggestion timing and the distribution movable valve 409 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in this embodiment will be described. The means for matching the movable timing will be described.

The movable pattern suggestion effect executed during the reach effect performed by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a variation display mode setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a music start timing adjustment process during the reach effect by the sub control device 262. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a process during reach effect by the sub control device 262.

(Variable display mode setting process)

As shown in FIG. 48, in step S1801, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S1802 if it has received the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to step S1804 if it has not received it.

In step S1802, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the music start timing adjustment process, and proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, a display command for displaying the reach effect image is set at the start timing adjusted by step S1802, and this process ends. If the variable display effect does not include the reach effect, or if there is no adjustment in step S1802, a display command for executing the corresponding variable display effect is set.

In step S1804, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1805 if it has received the decorative symbol designation command, and proceeds to step S1806 if it has not received it. In step S1805, a stop display command based on the stop symbol is set, and this process ends. In step S1806, a process during reach production, which will be described later, is performed.

(Music start timing adjustment processing during reach production)
In this embodiment, during the first super reach effect after switching from the right-handed game state to the left-handed game state, the first half of the reach effect displayed in the first half of the reach effect period and the movable display displayed in the middle of the reach effect period. The pattern suggestion effect and the second half of the reach effect displayed in the latter half of the reach effect period are continuously displayed. When it is necessary to match the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect with the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409, the adjustment effect described below is displayed before displaying the reach first half effect.

As shown in FIG. 49, in step S1900A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the right-handed game state has been switched to the left-handed game state. Specifically, in the above-mentioned switching timing example 1, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the ending command notifying the end of the jackpot state, it is determined that the right-handed game state has been switched to the left-handed game state. In the switching timing example 2 described above, the stop symbol time is determined when the jackpot determination table returns from the probability variation state jackpot determination table to the normal state jackpot determination table after the end of the probability variation state, or after the time reduction state ends. When the table for the time-saving state returns from the stop symbol time determination table for the time-saving state to the stop symbol time determination table for the non-time-saving state, it is determined that the right-handed game state has been switched to the left-handed game state. In the switching timing example 3 described above, when the hit determination table for the second symbol lottery returns from the high probability state to the normal probability state, it is determined that the right-handed game state has been switched to the left-handed game state.

In step S1900B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the game ball is held in the holding unit 403 of the holding device 400. Specifically, if the microswitch 418 detects that the game ball is on hold, the process proceeds to step S1901, and if the microswitch 418 detects that the game ball is not on hold, the process ends. This

In step S1901, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 analyzes the content of the variation pattern designation command, and when the variation display effect includes the reach effect, determines whether or not the reach effect is the super reach effect. .. If the reach effect is super reach, the process proceeds to step S1902, and if the reach effect is not super reach, the process ends without performing the music start timing adjustment process.

The reason why the music start timing adjustment process is not performed when it is not super reach is that it may not be possible to secure sufficient time to execute the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the case of normal reach. Even if the reach effect is other than the super reach effect, such a reach effect may be used as long as a sufficient time can be secured to execute the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect.

In step S1902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) taken from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command, and stores the RAM 553. Store in area v. This is because the time when the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern designation command can be regarded as the time when the variation display effect is started. In step S1903, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the received fluctuation pattern designation command and stores the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

In step S1904, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time stored in the RAM 553, which is the sum of the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the start of the fluctuation stored in the storage area w to the start of the reach effect. Store in area x. The total time stored in the storage area x corresponds to the time from the start time of one movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the start of the reach effect.

In step S1905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds, which corresponds to half the period of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409, and determines whether or not it is 15 seconds. If it is larger than, the process proceeds to step S1906, and if the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1914.

In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x coincides with 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1907, and if it is not equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1908.

In step S1907, the first half of the reach effect scheduled from the beginning is displayed without performing the adjustment effect. Then, as originally planned, the chorus part of the music A is started 30 seconds after the start of the reach production. At the same time as the start of the chorus part of the music A, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. In the movable pattern suggestion effect performed during the reach effect, only the portion of the music A or the music B used in the first embodiment including the suggestion timing corresponding to the movable pattern flows. For example, the portion of the music A or the music B that includes the suggested timing is applied to the chorus part of the music A or the chorus part of the music B.

In step S1908, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1909 if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds, and proceeds to step S1911 otherwise.

In step S1909, the storage area y stores the time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area x from 30 seconds, which corresponds to one period of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. In step S1910, the first half of the reach effect is displayed after the adjustment effect is performed for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect. Then, after a total of 30 seconds from the start of the reach effect and the time stored in the storage area y and 30 seconds from the start of the first half of the reach effect, the chorus portion of the music A is started. At the same time as the start of the chorus part of the music A, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

In step S1911, if the total time stored in the storage area x is larger than 30 seconds, which corresponds to one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409, the process proceeds to step S1912. In step S1912, the following calculation is performed and stored in the storage area y.
y = 15 seconds- (total time stored in storage area x-30 seconds)
Note that 15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

In step S1913, the first half of the reach effect is displayed after the adjustment effect is performed for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect. Then, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the chorus portion of the music B after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect and 30 seconds from the start of the first half of the reach effect. At the same time as the start of the chorus part of the music B, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

In step S1914, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds, which corresponds to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the total time is shorter than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1916.

In step S1915, the reach effect image scheduled from the beginning is displayed without performing the adjustment effect. That is, as originally planned, the chorus part of the music B is started 30 seconds after the start of the reach production. In step S1916, the storage area y stores the time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area x from 15 seconds, which corresponds to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. In step S1917, the first half of the reach effect is displayed after the adjustment effect is performed for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect. Then, after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect and 30 seconds from the start of the first half of the reach effect, the chorus portion of the music B is started. At the same time as the start of the chorus part of the music B, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

When the time required for the adjustment effect is determined, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 selects the reach second half effect to be executed after the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect, and sets the display on the third symbol display device 42. It is set that the longer the adjustment effect is, the shorter the reach second half effect is selected.

(Processing during reach production)
Next, the processing during the reach production will be described. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the movable pattern suggestion effect according to the present invention in the process during the reach effect shown in FIG.

In step S1951, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 displays the reach symbol on the third symbol display device 42. If the adjustment effect is not performed, the reach pattern is displayed from the first half of the reach effect. When the adjustment effect is performed, the reach symbol is displayed from the adjustment effect.

In step S1952, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the process during the movable pattern suggestion effect that is executed during the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the process during the movable pattern suggestion effect, for example, when the second frame button 21 is operated in accordance with the suggestion timing during the movable pattern suggestion effect, if the timing is correct, an image indicating that the timing is correct is displayed. Display or output the correct sound. If the timing is not correct, an image indicating that the timing is not correct is displayed or an erroneous sound is output.

In this way, if the variable display effect cannot be started from the start timing of the movable cycle (r = 30 seconds) or the timing of the half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 (r = 15 seconds), the original music A or By starting the chorus part of the music A or B after the time stored in the storage area y elapses from the start time of the chorus part of the music B, the start timing and the distribution of the chorus part of the music A or the music B can be moved. The start timing or half cycle timing of the movable cycle of the valve 409 can be matched. As a result, it is possible to execute the movable pattern suggestion effect in which the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A or the music B and the movement timing of the distribution movable valve 409 are matched. In the following, this movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with four examples.

Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. FIG. 51 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 52 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 during the reach effect. FIG. 53 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3 during the reach effect. FIG. 54 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 4 during the reach effect.

(Example of movable pattern suggestion effect 1 performed during reach effect)
As shown in FIG. 51, the distribution movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle composed of the same constant movable pattern as in the first embodiment. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot state ends with three game balls left in the holding device 400, and then the normal game state is resumed. Since it is easy for a game ball to enter the first start port 33b during the jackpot state, it is assumed that the number of pending fluctuation displays is four at the end of the jackpot. After the jackpot ends, the next variable display is started, and the result of the lottery is assumed to be out of super reach.

After the display of the result, the fluctuation display based on the next hold is started, and this fluctuation pattern command is a super reach effect (the lottery result may be hit or miss), and the fluctuation time from the start to the end of the fluctuation is 65 seconds. Yes, the reach effect is started 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the reach effect ends 60 seconds after the start of the reach effect (the variation display ends).

At this time, the variation display based on the next hold is started at the same timing as the movable timing t10, and 5 seconds later, the reach effect is started slightly later than the movable timing t11. The movable pattern suggestion effect is scheduled to start 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect, but the timing 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect is a timing slightly later than the movable timing t11, and the movable pattern B It is the timing on the way. In this case, if the chorus portion of the music B is started from the same timing as the movable timing t10, the suggested timing included in the chorus portion of the music B and the movable timing in each movable pattern do not match, so that the music is similar to the first embodiment. An adjustment effect is displayed to delay the start timing of the chorus portion of the music A or the music B so that the start timing of the chorus portion of the music A or the music B and the start timing of the movable pattern match.

The adjustment of the start timing of the chorus part of music A or music B is the time taken from the time of the movable cycle of 30 seconds to the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle to the reception time of the variation pattern specification command (hereinafter referred to as the delay time). Time y (hereinafter referred to as adjustment time y) obtained by subtracting the total time x of the time (hereinafter referred to as) v and the time required from the start of fluctuation to the start of reach production (hereinafter referred to as pre-reach time) w, music A or music B. It is to delay the start timing of the rust part of. Specifically, after performing the adjustment effect for 3 seconds (y time) obtained by subtracting 27 seconds (total time x) from the time of the movable cycle of 30 seconds, the chorus portion of the music A is adjusted to the start timing of the movable pattern A. To start.

The adjustment effect may be a reach effect after the adjustment time y and a series of reach effects as a part of the reach effect.

In this way, when the reach effect is the timing in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, the timing in the middle of the movable pattern B, the adjustment effect that delays the start timing of the chorus portion of the music A by the adjustment time y is actually performed. The timing at which the chorus portion of the music A is started coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timing constituting the movable pattern A coincides with the suggested timing in which the operation request image suggesting the movable timing is displayed.

With the start of the chorus part of the music A, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. A state in which three game balls are held in the holding device 400. The movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A coincide with the suggested timings st1 to st5 in which the operation request image is displayed. As a result, the player successfully operates the second frame button 21 at least three times out of the suggested timings st1 to st5 in accordance with the suggested timing, and thereby wins a general prize for the three game balls left in the holding device 400. The ball can be put into the mouth 31b. As a result, a maximum of 45 prize balls can be obtained during the reach production after the jackpot state ends.

12 seconds remain from the end timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 to the end timing of the reach effect (variable display effect). In the second half of the reach effect, an image for 12 seconds is selected, and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 2 performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that the variation display starts 3 seconds after the timing t10, that is, 25 seconds after the start of the movable cycle, and the reach effect starts 5 seconds after the start of the variation display. Then, in this case, if the chorus part (movable pattern suggestion effect) of the music A is started 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect, the movable pattern A can be performed without delaying the start timing of the chorus part of the music A. The movable timing of t2 to t6 and the suggested timing of st2 to st6 coincide with each other.

15 seconds remain from the end timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 to the end timing of the reach effect (variable display effect). In the reach second half effect, an image for 15 seconds is selected, and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 3 performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that the start of the variable display is the movable timing t2, that is, 4 seconds after the start of the movable cycle, and the reach effect is started 5 seconds after the start of the variable display. Then, if the chorus part (movable pattern suggestion effect) of the music A is started 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect, the movable timing of t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A and the suggested timing of st2 to st6 match. do not do.

Therefore, the adjustment time y (6 seconds) obtained by subtracting the total time x (9 seconds) of the delay time v (4 seconds) and the pre-reach time w (5 seconds) from the time 15 seconds corresponding to the half cycle of the movable cycle. , Display an adjustment effect that delays the start timing of the chorus part of music B. In this way, by performing the adjustment effect for 6 seconds, the timing at which the chorus portion of the music B is actually started is 36 seconds after the disclosure of the reach effect, which is a half cycle of the movable cycle, that is, the start timing of the movable pattern B. Match. As a result, at the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B and the suggested timings st6 to st10 coincide with each other.

9 seconds remain from the end timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3 to the end timing of the reach effect (variable display effect). In the reach second half effect, an image for 9 seconds is selected, and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42.

(Example 4 of movable pattern suggestion production performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 54, it is assumed that the figure variation display starts 10 seconds after the start of the movable timing t4, that is, the movable cycle, and the reach effect starts 5 seconds after the start of the variable display. Then, in this case, if the chorus part (movable pattern suggestion effect) of the music B is started 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect, the movable pattern B can be performed without delaying the start timing of the chorus part of the music B. The movable timings t8 to t12 and the suggested timings st6 to st10 that constitute the above coincide with each other.

15 seconds remain from the end timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 4 to the end timing of the reach effect (variable display effect). In the reach second half effect, an image for 15 seconds is selected, and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42.

Next, the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the reach effect. Note that FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b) correspond to FIGS. 37 (c) and 37 (d) of the movable pattern suggestion effect of the first embodiment.

The third symbol display device 42 is the same as the movable pattern suggestion effect of the first embodiment, except that the reach symbol image 427 indicating that the reach effect is being produced is displayed (FIGS. 36A to 36A). 39 (p)). The reach symbol image 427 is, for example, an image showing a reach in which two symbols "7" and "7" are aligned. Further, the operation explanation image 423, the operation timing image 425, and the first operation request image 431 are displayed on the third symbol display device 42 as in the first embodiment. When the player presses the second frame button 42 at the timing when the operation timing image 425 and the first operation request image 431 completely overlap with each other, the player presses the second frame button 42 and presses the second frame button 42. The movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 matches. Similarly, in the second operation request image 432 to the fifth operation request image (not shown), the second frame button 42 is operated at the timing when the operation timing image 425 and the operation request image completely overlap.

Next, the lower right gaming area 302c of the game board 30 during the execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect during the reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a lower right game area 302c of the game board 30 in a state where the game ball is held. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a lower right game area 302c of the game board 30 in a state where the game ball is not held.

As shown in FIG. 57, a plurality of game balls may remain in the holding device 400 after the right-handed game state ends. In the movable pattern suggestion production performed during the reach production in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state, the player presses the second frame button 21 according to the suggestion timing displayed together with the chorus part of the music A or the music B. If the player can hit the ball well, as shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 referred to in the first embodiment, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is placed on the distribution movable valve 409 to win a prize in the general winning opening 30b. Can be done. That is, if the game ball remains in the holding device 400 after the end of the right-handed game state, the player actively plays a movable pattern suggestion effect in the predetermined reach effect in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state. By participating, it is possible to obtain a prize ball acquisition opportunity according to the number of game balls left in the holding device 400.

Therefore, there is a possibility that a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held during the right-handed game state is obtained during the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the right-handed game state, and improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400. Further, when a predetermined reach effect is displayed in the left-handed game state after the right-handed game state ends, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed, and the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 by the movable pattern suggestion effect. For a player who knows that there is a chance to acquire a predetermined game value according to the above, the player tries to continue the game until the predetermined reach effect is established in the left-handed game state after the right-handed game state ends. It is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the game ball is not held by the holding device 400 after the right-handed game state ends, a predetermined reach effect is displayed in the left-handed game state after the right-handed game state ends. Even in this case, the movable pattern suggestion effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player by displaying the movable pattern suggestion effect in the state where the game ball is not held on the holding unit 403.

When the micro switch 418 detects that the game ball is held on the holding device 400, the third symbol display device 42 displays a display suggesting that the movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed. This may be done to motivate the player to continue the game until a predetermined reach effect is established.

The above-mentioned variable display effect selection unit (function of executing the process of step S503 possessed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) corresponds to the variable display effect selection means of the present invention. The first start port 33b corresponds to the second start ball entry means of the present invention, and the ball entry detection switch 31d corresponds to the second ball entry detection means. The function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that draws a lottery as to whether or not to generate a jackpot state based on the detection of entering a ball into the first starting port 33b corresponds to the second lottery means of the present invention. The passage detection switch 34a corresponds to the game ball passage detection means of the present invention. The function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs a lottery per second symbol based on the detection of passage to the second starting port 34 corresponds to the third lottery means of the present invention. The microswitch 418 corresponds to the holding ball detecting means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a lottery is performed in which it is possible to determine whether or not a right-handed advantageous gaming state is generated based on the detection of the gaming balls by the ball entry detection units 31a and 31b. A lottery section is provided, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the lottery by the lottery section. When the result of the lottery is a specific result, the right-handed game is performed as a right-handed advantageous game state. A gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state occurs, and after the right-handed advantageous gaming state ends, the gaming state is switched to the left-handing gaming state. The operation effect control unit controls to display the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42 based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the right-handed advantageous game state ends. To do. Therefore, if the player plays a right-handed game during the right-handed advantageous game state, the game ball held by the holding device 400 remains after switching from the right-handed advantageous game state to the game state in which the left-handed game is performed. Also, actively participate in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the left-handed game state, and the first to fifth movement pattern suggestion effects are in progress. If the second frame button 21 can be operated well at the timing when the operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed, in addition to the benefits that the player can enjoy during the right-handed advantageous gaming state, the holding device 400 remains. A predetermined game value according to the number of game balls can be obtained in a game state in which a left-handed game is performed after switching. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device 400 can be improved.

Further, in the jackpot game in which the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state is executed a plurality of times, the game ball launched by right-handed hitting enters the variable winning device 32 in a right-handed advantageous state. is there. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the variable winning device 32, the game ball may be held by the holding device 400. If the odor movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the jackpot game is completed, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held. Therefore, the advantage of the player can be enhanced even if the game ball is held by the holding device 400 during the jackpot state.

Further, in the high-probability game state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery section becomes a big hit result is increased after the end of the big hit game in which the variable winning device 32 changes to the open state and the closed state, the game fired by right-handed When the ball enters the first starting port 33b, a lottery based on the ball entry detection by the ball entry detection unit 31b is performed with a high probability, which is a right-handed advantageous state. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 31b, the game ball may be held by the holding device 400, which suggests a movable pattern in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the high-probability game state ends. If the effect is displayed, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held. Therefore, the advantage of the player can be enhanced even if the game ball is held by the holding device 400 during the high-probability game state.

After the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state is completed, in the time saving state in which the time for displaying the variation of the symbol is shortened, the game ball fired by right-handed hits the first starting port 33b. By entering the ball, it is a right-handed advantageous state in which the variation of the symbol is displayed according to the result of the lottery based on the entry detection by the entry detection unit 31b in a shortened time. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 31b, the game ball may be held by the holding device 400. In the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the time saving state, a movable pattern suggestion effect is produced. If displayed, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the merit of the player even if the game ball is held by the holding device 400 during the time saving state.

In addition, the game ball launched during the right-handed game is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and changes between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. The right-handed advantageous game described above based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port 33b, the ball entry detection switch 31b that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 33b, and the ball entry detection switch 31b. A second lottery unit that performs a second lottery that can determine whether or not to cause a state, a passage detection switch 34a that detects the passage of a game ball that is launched during a right-handed game, and a game ball by the passage detection switch 34a. A third lottery unit for performing a third lottery as to whether or not to open the first start port 33b based on the detection of the above is provided. After the end of the jackpot game, when the result of the third lottery is the result of opening the first starting port 33b, the time longer than the time when the first starting port 33b is opened in other game states. The support gaming state in which the first starting port 33b is open is a gaming state in which the advantage cannot be obtained by left-handed hitting, and thus is a right-handed hitting advantageous gaming state. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the passage detection switch 34a, the game ball may be held by the holding device 400. If the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the support game state, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held. Therefore, the advantage of the player can be enhanced even if the game ball is held by the holding device 400 during the support game state.

Based on the lottery result in the lottery section, it is equipped with a variable display effect selection unit that selects a predetermined variable display effect from a plurality of variable display effects that change the symbol, and left-handed after the end of the right-handed advantageous gaming state. In the game state in which the game is played, the variable display effect includes a predetermined reach effect performed by displaying a symbol forming a part of a specific combination representing a specific result as a result of the lottery, and the display time of the reach effect is at least operated. When the display time of the effect is longer than the display time of the effect, the execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, so that the reach effect in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state is displayed. The time can be entertained by the player.

Further, the expectation degree suggesting that the predetermined reach effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state becomes the right-handed advantageous game state is predetermined. When the pattern includes a higher super reach effect than the normal reach effect, which is the height, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, so that the left side after the end of the right-handed advantageous gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with the display time of the reach effect including the specific expected effect in the game state in which the hitting game is performed.

Further, in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state, the lottery result in the lottery section is a disappointing result that does not become the right-handed advantageous game state, and the variable display selected after the second specific result. When the effect includes the above-mentioned predetermined reach effect, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, so that the lottery is performed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state. If the result of the lottery in the club is a disappointment result that does not result in a right-handed advantageous game state, a predetermined opportunity is given after the disappointment result to allow the game ball held during the previous advantageous game state to win a prize in the winning opening. By giving it during the reach production, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the result is not an advantageous gaming state.

In the reach effect, a pattern including an expected effect having a predetermined height of expectation suggesting that the advantageous gaming state is reached and an expectation degree suggesting that the advantageous gaming state is reached are the expected effects. Including at least a pattern that includes a higher specific expectation effect as a component,
The predetermined condition is a second specific result in which the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the advantageous game state in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state, and the second specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined reach effect leading to a result is a pattern including the specific expected effect.

As for the reach effect, the pattern including the reach effect in which the expectation degree suggesting that the right-handed advantageous gaming state is set to a predetermined height and the expectation degree suggesting that the right-handed advantageous gaming state is reached are described above. In the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state, the lottery result in the lottery section is the right-handed advantageous game state, including at least a pattern including a super reach effect higher than the reach effect as a component. The movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 when the result is no deviation and the predetermined reach effect leading to the deviation result is a pattern including the super reach effect. As a result, when the lottery result in the lottery section performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state is a disappointment result that does not result in the right-handed advantageous game state even though it includes a highly expected super reach effect. Gives the opportunity to win the general winning opening 31b the game ball held during the right-handed advantageous game state during the predetermined reach effect, even though the variable display effect including the super reach effect is executed. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of having a specific result that is not in an advantageous gaming state.

In addition, the variable display effect has a pattern that includes a normal reach effect in which the expectation level suggesting that the special game state is set to a predetermined height, and an expectation level that suggests the special game state is higher than the expected level. The movable pattern suggestion effect includes at least a pattern that includes a high super reach effect as a component, and the lottery result in the lottery section is a display result that is out of the super reach, and the variable display effect that leads to the display result is super. If the pattern includes a reach effect, it is executed during the super reach effect performed after the display result. As a result, if the lottery result in the lottery section performed after the end of the jackpot state is a display result of the super reach out of the jackpot state even though the lottery result includes the super reach effect with high expectation. By giving the general winning opening 31b the opportunity to win the game ball held during the previous jackpot state during the variable display production, the super reach effect is not set to the special game state even though the super reach effect is executed. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the display result.

Further, the holding ball detection unit 418 for detecting the game ball held by the holding device 400 is provided, and the operation effect control unit is a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and the game is held by the holding device 400 by the holding ball detection unit 418. Based on the determination that there is a sphere, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player by executing the movable pattern suggestion effect even though there is no game ball held by the holding device 400.

In the first and second embodiments, the game ball is held by the holding device 400 during the right-handed game state such as during the jackpot state or during the probability change state after the jackpot state ends, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed during the right-handed game state. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball may be held by the holding device 400 during the normal game state, and the movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed during the specific variation display of the normal game state. A configuration that makes it easy for the game ball to be held by the holding device 400 during the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Note that FIG. 58 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board in a state of being attached to the inner frame in the third embodiment.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the game board 30 is configured so that the game ball flowing down the lower right game area 30a3 is easily held by the holding device 400. Specifically, a plurality of guiding nails 39 so as to facilitate guiding the game ball flowing down the left side of the first starting port 33b toward the holding portion 403 of the holding device 400 in the front view of the game board 30. Are arranged. Therefore, in Examples 1 and 2, when the game ball is continuously fired for 75 seconds in the right-handed game, 5 game balls are held, but in this embodiment, the game ball is fired for 60 seconds in the right-handed game. If it continues, 5 game balls are reserved.

As in the first and second embodiments, the distribution movable valve 409 performs a distribution operation using the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B. Further, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed by using the chorus portion of the music A or the music B as in the first and second embodiments. However, in this embodiment, the music A or the music B is started from the start of the reach production. Further, the music A or the music B is placed in the chorus portion 60 seconds after the music starts, that is, 60 seconds after the reach production starts (this timing is also the timing when the above-mentioned five game balls are expected to be held). Shall reach. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by matching the start timing of the music A or the music B with the start timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B, the suggested timing in the movable pattern suggestion effect is set to the movable timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B. Can be adjusted to.

The movable pattern suggestion effect executed by the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment during the specific variation display in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a music start timing adjustment process during the reach effect in the normal gaming state by the sub control device 262. FIG. 60 is a table for determining the start timing of the music used for the reach production and the music used for the reach production. Other processes by the sub control device 262 are the same as those in the second embodiment.

(Music start timing adjustment processing during reach production in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 59, in step S2001, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the game ball is held in the holding portion 403 of the holding device 400. Specifically, if the microswitch 418 (see FIG. 57) detects that the game ball is on hold, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the microswitch 418 detects that the game ball is not on hold, this process is performed. finish.

In step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the content of the variation pattern designation command and determines whether or not the reach effect is a super reach effect when the variation display effect includes the reach effect. .. If the reach effect is super reach, the process proceeds to step S2003, and if the reach effect is not super reach, the process ends without performing the music start timing adjustment process. It should be noted that even if the reach effect is other than the super reach effect, it is the same as in the second embodiment that the reach effect is sufficient as long as a sufficient time can be secured to execute the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect.

In step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) taken from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command, and stores the RAM 553. Store in area v. This is because the time when the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern designation command can be regarded as the time when the variation display effect is started. In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 analyzes the received fluctuation pattern designation command and stores the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

In step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time stored in the RAM 553, which is the sum of the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the start of the fluctuation stored in the storage area w to the start of the reach effect. Store in area x. The total time stored in the storage area x corresponds to the time from the start time of one movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the start of the reach effect.

In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is larger than 15 seconds, which corresponds to half the period of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409, and determines whether the total time is 15 seconds. If it is larger than, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2016.

In step S2007, it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x coincides with 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2008, and if it is not equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2008, 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y as the adjustment time for performing the adjustment effect for adjusting the start timing of the music in the reach effect. In step S2009, the music B in the super reach effect is started after the adjustment effect is performed for 15 seconds stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect. The adjustment effect is a right-handed notification effect that notifies the player that a right-handed game will be performed during the reach effect. The right-handed notification effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image such as "Aim at the right" on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42. The movable pattern suggestion effect is started 60 seconds after the start of the music B.

In step S2010, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2011 if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds, and proceeds to step S2013 otherwise.

In step S2011, the storage area y stores the time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area x from 30 seconds corresponding to one period of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. In step S2012, the music A in the super reach effect is started after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect and the right-handed notification effect as the adjustment effect. The movable pattern suggestion effect is started 60 seconds after the start of the music A.

In step S2013, if the total time stored in the storage area x is larger than 30 seconds, which corresponds to one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, the following calculation is performed and stored in the storage area y.
y = 15 seconds- (total time stored in storage area x-30 seconds)
Note that 15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

In step S2015, the music B in the super reach effect is started after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect and the right-handed notification effect as the adjustment effect. The movable pattern suggestion effect is started 60 seconds after the start of the music B.

In step S2016, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds, which corresponds to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2017, and if the total time is shorter than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2019.

In step S2017, 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y as the adjustment time for performing the right-handed notification effect as the adjustment effect. In step S2018, the music A in the super reach effect is started after the adjustment effect is performed for 15 seconds stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect.

In step S2019, the storage area y stores the time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area x from 15 seconds, which corresponds to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. In step S2020, the music B in the super reach effect is started after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect and the right-handed notification effect as the adjustment effect. In addition, 60 seconds after the start of the music B, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

The process of adjusting the start timing of the music A or the music B used for the reach effect as described above may be performed using the table stored in the ROM 551 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 as shown in FIG. ..

In this way, even if the reach effect cannot be started in accordance with the start timing of the movable patterns A and B, by delaying the start timing of the music A or the music B by a predetermined adjustment time, the music A or the music B can be started. The start timing can be matched with the start timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B, and the suggested timing in the movable pattern suggestion effect can be matched with the movable timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B. As a result, it is possible to execute the movable pattern suggestion effect in which the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A or the music B and the movement timing of the distribution movable valve 409 are matched. In the following, this movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with an example.

Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect in the normal gaming state and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect in the normal gaming state and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Example of movable pattern suggestion effect performed during reach effect in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 61, the distribution movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle composed of the same constant movable pattern as in the first and second embodiments. Here, in the normal game state, the variation display is started, and this variation pattern command is a super reach effect (the lottery result may be a hit or a miss), and the reach effect time is 120 seconds.

At this time, the above fluctuation display is started at the same timing as the movable timing t10 (22 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), and after the fluctuation display is performed for 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect, it is slightly smaller than the movable timing t11. The reach effect is started at a delayed timing (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle). That is, the delay time v of the fluctuation start is 22 seconds, the time w from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect is 5 seconds, and the time x obtained by adding the time v and the time w is 27 seconds. The time y for performing the above is 3 seconds, and the music in the reach production and the movable pattern suggestion production is music A (see also FIG. 60).

Therefore, a right-handed notification effect as an adjustment effect is performed for 3 seconds from the start of the reach effect. The right-handed notification effect is displayed as a still image or a moving image, but is displayed as an image having a smaller amount of information than the movable pattern suggestion effect in order to reduce the amount of memory used in the adjustment effect. The music A in the reach effect is started at the same time as the end timing of the right-handed notification effect. Since the end timing of the right-handed notification effect coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A, the music A in the reach effect is started at the same time as the start of the movable pattern A. As a result, the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A 60 seconds after the start of the music A can be matched with the movement timings t2 to t6 of the movement pattern A. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t2 to 6 constituting the movable pattern A and the timing of displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st5 are matched. Can be done.

As a result, the player can put the five game balls held by the holding device 400 on the distribution movable valve 409 by successfully operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggested timings st1 to st5. , It becomes easy to enter the ball into the general winning opening 31b. As a result, a maximum of 75 prize balls can be obtained during the reach production.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the holding device 400 holds a game ball launched in a right-handed game, at least in a non-special game state (normal game state) that is not a special game state. It changes to a possible hold state and a release state in which the hold of the game ball is released. The operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 displays the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol during the normal game state and during the specific variable display (for example, super reach effect) according to the result of the lottery. It is controlled to be displayed on the device 42. Therefore, if the player fires a game ball by hitting right during the super reach effect in the normal game state, a part of the fired game balls is held by the holding device 400. It is possible to secure an opportunity to hold the game ball in the holding device 400 during the reach effect. The player operates the second frame button 21 at the timing when the operation request is displayed in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the super reach effect, thereby causing the distribution movable valve. The holding device 400 can be changed from the holding state to the releasing state at the timing when the 409 comes to the second position (protruding position). As a result, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win the general winning opening 31b via the distribution movable valve 409 that comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the second frame button 21 receives an operation of the player at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the distribution movable valve 409 is the second timing at which the holding device 400 changes from the holding state to the releasing state. Since it does not match the timing of coming to the position, it becomes difficult to win the general winning opening 31b. Therefore, if the player plays a right-handed game during the super reach effect, he / she actively participates in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the super reach effect, and is in the movable pattern suggestion effect. If the second frame button 21 can be successfully operated at the timing when the operation request is displayed, a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held by the holding device 400 can be obtained in the normal game state. Can be done. As a result, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device 400 can be improved.

Further, by having the player participate in the game using the holding device 400 performed during the super reach production, it is possible to reduce the player getting bored with the reach production having a long fluctuation time such as the super reach production.

Further, the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 notifies the player that the right-handed game is to be performed during the super reach effect, and suggests a movable pattern during the super reach effect after the right-handed notification. The effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 after the right-handed notification is performed during the super reach effect by the operation effect control unit, so that the player can hold the device during the super reach effect. It is possible to reduce the chance of missing the opportunity to hold the game ball at 400.

In this embodiment, instead of eliminating the game parts having the opening / closing door 32b used as the variable winning device 32 in Examples 1 to 3 and the game parts used as the second starting port 34, in Examples 1 to 3 The game component used as the first starting port 33b is used as the variable winning device 32. The configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 of the fourth embodiment in a state of being attached to the inner frame 12.

In this embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate the jackpot state is performed based on the ball entry detection at the first starting port 33a. When the result of the lottery based on the ball entry detection at the first starting port 33a is the result of generating a big hit state, the opening / closing member 33c that opened / closed the first starting port 33b in the first to third embodiments may be used. It functions as a door member 32b (referred to as an opening / closing member 33d in this embodiment) that has opened / closed the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the first to third embodiments.

Since the opening / closing member 33d of the variable winning device 32 is closed during the normal game state, the game ball launched in the right-handed game rolls on the opening / closing member 33d and is downstream of the opening / closing member 33d (game). It is discharged from the left end portion of the board 30 when viewed from the front. The discharged game ball may be guided to the holding device 400 side while being rolled by a nail or the like arranged between the variable winning device 32 and the holding device 400, or may be guided to the holding device 400 side. It may not be done. The ratio of the game balls rolled by nails or the like guided to the holding device 400 is about the same as in Examples 1 to 3.

During the jackpot state, the opening / closing member 33d of the variable winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state. Therefore, during the opening of the opening / closing member 33d, even a game ball fired in a right-handed game is placed on the holding device 400. Although not guided, while the opening / closing member 33d is closed, the game ball launched in the right-handed game may roll on the opening / closing member 33d and be guided to the holding device 400. However, since the time in the closed state during the jackpot state is sufficiently shorter than the time in the open state, the game ball launched in the right-handed game during the jackpot state is the holding device 400 as compared with the normal game state. It is difficult to be guided by.

In this way, the game board 30 is configured so that the game ball launched in the right-handed game is more easily held by the holding device 400 in the normal game state than in the jackpot state. As a result, when the right-handed notification effect as described in the third embodiment is executed during the super reach effect as a specific variable display in the normal game state, the player can perform the right-handed game rather than the jackpot state. Aiming at the holding device 400 in which the fired game ball is easily held, the right-handed game is actively performed. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game using the holding device 400 can be increased.

Further, the game ball launched in the right-handed game in the normal game state rolls on the opening / closing member 33d which is always closed in the normal game state and is surely guided to the holding device 400 side, so that the nail adjustment It is possible to guide the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device 400 side more reliably than in the case of guiding to the holding device 400 side only by.

The opening / closing member 33d described above corresponds to the guiding member of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the game board 30, the game ball launched in the right-handed game is more likely to be held by the holding device 400 in the normal game state than in the jackpot state. It is configured. As a result, the game ball launched in the right-handed game is more likely to be held by the holding device 400 in the normal game state than in the jackpot state due to the configuration of the game board 30, so that the game ball can be held as a specific variable display in the normal game state. It is possible to have the player actively perform a right-handed game during the super reach production.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with, for example, an opening / closing member 33d of the variable winning device 32 as a guiding member for guiding the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device 400 in the normal game state. As a result, the game ball launched in the right-handed game in the normal game state is guided to the holding device 400 side by the opening / closing member 33d of the variable winning device 32 provided on the game board 30, so that the holding device 400 is only adjusted by nail adjustment. It is possible to guide the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device 400 side more reliably than in the case of guiding to the side.

In this embodiment, instead of eliminating the game parts used as the first starting port 33b and the game parts used as the second starting port 34 in Examples 1 to 3, the first in Examples 1 to 3 Only the game parts (referred to as the opening / closing member 33e in this embodiment) used as the opening / closing member 33c for opening / closing the starting port 33b are left. The configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 of the fifth embodiment in a state of being attached to the inner frame 12.

In this embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate the jackpot state is performed based on the ball entry detection at the first starting port 33a. When the variation display based on the result of the lottery based on the ball entry detection at the first starting port 33a includes a specific variation display, the opening / closing member 33e is on the front side of the lower right game area 30a3 during the specific variation display. It is configured to repeat the operation of protruding to the back side and the operation of retracting to the back surface side of the lower right game area 30a3. The specific variation display is, for example, a super reach effect as described in the third embodiment. Further, the opening / closing member 33e is configured so as not to perform the protruding and shunting operations when the variation display based on the result of the lottery based on the ball entry detection at the first starting port 33a does not include the specific variation display. ing. The opening / closing member 33e may be configured to continue to protrude during the period in which the specific variation display is displayed.

During the super reach effect as a specific variation display, the opening / closing member 33e repeats the projecting and shunting operations, so that the game ball launched in the right-handed game is the opening / closing member projecting to the front side of the lower right game area 30a3. It rolls on the 33e and is discharged from the downstream side of the opening / closing member 33e. The discharged game ball may be guided to the holding device 400 side while being rolled by a nail or the like arranged between the opening / closing member 33e and the holding device 400, or may not be guided to the holding device 400 side. In some cases. The rate at which the game ball rolled by a nail or the like is guided to the holding device 400 is about the same as in Examples 1 to 3.

During the reach effect, which is different from the super reach effect, or during the non-reach variable display, the opening / closing member 33e does not protrude and remains shunted to the back side of the lower right game area 30a3. Even the fired game ball is not guided to the holding device 400.

In this way, in the game board 30, the game ball fired in the right-handed game is held by the holding device 400 during the super reach production rather than during the reach production or the non-reach variable display different from the super reach production. It is configured so that it can be easily held on the side. As a result, when the right-handed notification effect as described in the third embodiment is executed during the super reach effect, the player is on the right side of the reach effect different from the super reach effect or the non-reach variable display. Aiming at the holding device 400 in which the game ball launched in the hitting game is easily held, the right-handed game is actively performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's intention to participate in the game using the holding device 400 during the super reach effect.

Further, the game ball launched in the right-handed game during the super reach effect rolls on the opening / closing member 33e while the opening / closing member 33e projects toward the front side of the lower right game area 30a3, and the holding device 400 Since it is surely guided to the side, it is possible to guide the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device 400 side more reliably than when guiding it to the holding device 400 side only by adjusting the nails. it can.

The opening / closing member 33e described above corresponds to the guiding member of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the game board 30 is on the right side during the super reach effect than during the reach effect or the non-reach variable display, which is different from the super reach effect. The game ball launched in the hitting game is easily held on the holding device 400 side. As a result, the game ball launched in the right-handed game is more likely to be held on the holding device 400 side during the super reach effect than during the reach effect, which is different from the super reach effect, due to the configuration of the game board 30. Although it is the original game that a person plays a right-handed game during a super reach production in a normal game state, the original game is that a player plays a right-handed game during another reach production in a normal game state. It is possible to reduce the number of games that deviate from the game.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with an opening / closing member 33e as a guiding member for guiding the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device during the super reach effect. As a result, the game ball launched in the right-handed game during the super reach effect is guided to the holding device 400 side by the opening / closing member 33e provided on the game board 30, and thus guided to the holding device 400 side by adjusting the nails. More reliably than in the case, the game ball launched in the right-handed game during the super reach effect can be guided to the holding device 400 side.

In Examples 1 to 5 described above, the timing at which the display of the movable pattern suggestion effect is started is after a predetermined time has elapsed from a certain timing, but the movable pattern suggestion effect is at an arbitrary time from a certain timing. It does not matter even after the lapse. For example, the movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed based on the predetermined number of game balls held by the holding device 400.

Hereinafter, a configuration required for a game machine that executes a movable pattern suggestion effect based on the detection of a full tank of a game ball held by the holding device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 of the sixth embodiment in a state of being attached to the inner frame 12. FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of the lower right game area 30a3 in the game board 30 of the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG. 65 shows a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400, as in FIG. 4 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the holding device 400 is provided with a holding ball detection switch 437 as a game ball detecting means on the upstream side of the holding portion 403, and as a game ball detecting means on the downstream side. A holding ball detection switch 438 is provided. As a result, the game balls guided to the holding device 400 enter the holding device 400 through the through hole of the holding ball detection switch 437, and are stored in the holding device 403 up to a maximum of 5 balls, and the second frame button 21 By driving the discharge blocking valve 405 by pressing the button, the battery is discharged from the holding unit 403 and discharged from the holding device 400 through the through hole of the holding ball detection switch 437. When the game ball discharged to the outside of the holding device 400 gets on the distribution movable valve 409 protruding from the lower part of the holding device 400, it is guided to the general winning opening 31b and enters the general winning opening 31b.

Two movable decorative pieces 415 are arranged on the decorative plate 413 that covers the front surface of the holding device 400. One movable decorative piece 415 is arranged in front of the discharge blocking valve 405, and the other movable decorative piece 415 is arranged in front of the distribution movable valve 409. The two movable decorative pieces 415 are operating at timings that are not motivated by the distribution operation of the movable decorative pieces 415 and the distribution movable valve 409, respectively. This makes it difficult to press the second frame button 21 in accordance with the timing of the distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds 1 to the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 based on the detection of the game ball passage by the hold ball detection switch 437, and the game ball passage by the hold ball detection switch 438. The number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 is subtracted by 1 based on the detection of. As described above, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has a counting function for counting the number of game balls held by the holding device 400.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 compares the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 with the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the ROM 552 in advance (for example, 5 balls in the case of a full tank). It also has a function of determining whether or not the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 has reached a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls in the case of a full tank). That is, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 includes a full tank determination unit that determines whether or not the number of game balls held by the holding device 400 has reached the full tank.

In this embodiment, the movable pattern is based on the fact that the game balls held by the holding device 400 are full (five balls are held) during a specific fluctuation display (for example, during super reach production) in the normal game state. Perform a suggestion effect.

There are various timings when the game ball held by the holding device 400 is full. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is a video of a music (hereinafter, music C) different from the music A or the music B until the game ball held by the music holding device 400 is full. And music is played, and at the timing when the game ball held by the holding device 400 is full, the video and music of the chorus part of the music A or the music B constituting the movable pattern suggestion effect are switched.

The movable pattern suggestion effect executed during the reach effect in the normal gaming state performed by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 73. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a variation display mode setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a lower limit start time setting process during the reach effect by the sub control device 262. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the full tank detection performed by the sub control device 262. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start time performed by the sub control device 262. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a music switching timing adjustment process by full tank detection performed by the sub control device 262. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a music switching timing adjustment process according to the lower limit start time performed by the sub control device 262. FIG. 72 is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music being processed for the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 73 is a table for determining the lower limit start time and the music being processed for suggesting a movable pattern.

(Variable display mode setting process)
Since the variable display mode setting process of this embodiment is different from the variable display mode setting process described with reference to FIG. 48 in the second embodiment, the process for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect is focused on this point. explain.

As shown in FIG. 66, in step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a start music determination process for determining the music to be played first in the reach effect, and proceeds to step S2103. When the variation pattern designation command indicates a super reach effect, the song at the start of the super reach effect is determined to be the song C. For other reach productions, the music is determined according to the type of reach production.

In step S2103, the lower limit start time setting process for setting the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the reach effect is performed. The lower limit start time setting process during the reach effect will be described below.

(Lower limit start time setting process during reach production)
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 takes time (delay time) from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command. Is acquired and stored in the storage area v of the RAM 553. In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 analyzes the received fluctuation pattern designation command and stores the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

In step S2302A, the received variation pattern designation command is analyzed, and the reach effect time from the start to the end of the reach effect is stored in the storage area z of the RAM 553. In step S2303, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time stored in the RAM 553, which is the sum of the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the start of the fluctuation stored in the storage area w to the start of the reach effect. Store in area x.

In step S2304, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is larger than 15 seconds, which corresponds to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2305, and if the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2314.

In step S2305, it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x coincides with 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2306, and if it is not equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2308.

In step S2306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 subtracts 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect from the reach effect time stored in the storage area z, which is the latest time at which the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. The time (lower limit start time) is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553. In step S2307, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the lower limit start time flag 1 indicating the lower limit start time.

In step S2308, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area x is within a range of more than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds. If the result of the determination is within the range, the process proceeds to step S2309, and if the result of the determination is not within the range, the process proceeds to step S2311.

In step S2309, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the time obtained by subtracting the time stored in the storage area x from the reach effect time stored in the storage area z as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect, which is the storage area of the RAM 5543. Let y remember. In step S2310, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the lower limit start time flag 2 indicating the lower limit start time.

In step S2311, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area x is longer than 30 seconds. If the result of the determination is larger than 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2312.

In step S2312, from the reach effect time stored in the storage area z, the time (x-30) of the time stored in the storage area x exceeds 30 seconds, and 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect. Is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553 as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect. In step S2313, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the lower limit start time flag 3 indicating the lower limit start time.

In step S2314, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds. If the result of the determination is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2315, and if the result of the determination is not equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2317.

In step S2315, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect from the reach effect time stored in the storage area z as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect. It is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553. In step S2316, the lower limit start time flag 4 indicating the lower limit start time is set.

In step S2317, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 starts the lower limit of the movable pattern suggestion effect by subtracting the time stored in the storage area x and 15 seconds from the reach effect time stored in the storage area z. It is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553 as time. In step S2318, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the lower limit start time flag 5 indicating the lower limit start time.

Returning to the description of FIG. After the lower limit start time setting process in step S2103 is completed, in step S2104, a display command for displaying the reach effect image accompanied by the music determined in step S2102 is set, and this process is terminated.

In step S2105, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the game ball held by the holding device 400 is full (full tank detection). If the result of the determination is full, the process proceeds to step S2106, and if the result of the determination is not full, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2106, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by detecting the full tank.

(Movable pattern suggestion effect processing by full tank detection)
Here, the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the full tank detection will be described with reference to FIG. 68. In step S2107A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the music switching timing adjustment process by detecting the full tank, which will be described later, and proceeds to step S2107B. In step S2107B, a display command for displaying a movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music switched in step S2107A is set, and the process proceeds to step S2107C.

In step S2107C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion effect is completed. In such a determination, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 turns on the movable pattern suggestion effect executing flag at the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect, and turns the flag off at the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect. It is realized by being done. When the movable pattern suggestion effect is completed, the process proceeds to step S2107D, and if the movable pattern suggestion effect is not completed, this process ends. In step S2107D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect to the music C at the start of the super reach effect, and ends this process.

The description returns to FIG. In step S2108, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the elapsed time of the reach effect has reached the lower limit start time. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time, the process proceeds to step S2109, and if the result of the determination is not the lower limit start time, the process proceeds to step S2111. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 includes a lower limit start time determination unit as a function of determining whether or not the elapsed time of the reach effect has reached the lower limit start time.

In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the movable pattern suggestion effect processing according to the lower limit start time for performing the movable pattern suggestion effect when the lower limit start time is reached.

(Movable pattern suggestion effect processing by lower limit start time)
Here, the movable pattern suggestion effect processing based on the lower limit start time will be described with reference to FIG. 69. In step S2110A, the music switching process is performed according to the lower limit start time described later, and the process proceeds to step S2110B. In step S2110B, a display command for displaying a movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music switched in step S2110A is set, and the process proceeds to step S2110C.

In step S2110C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion effect is completed. Such a determination is as described above with reference to step S2107C shown in FIG. 68. When the movable pattern suggestion effect is completed, the process proceeds to step S2110D, and if the movable pattern suggestion effect is not completed, this process ends. In step S2110D, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect by the lower limit start time to the music C at the start of the super reach effect, and ends this process.

(Music switching timing adjustment processing by full tank detection)
The music switching timing adjustment process by detecting the full tank in step S2107A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 70, in step S2401, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 reaches the full number of game balls held in the holding device 400 from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. The time (delay time) detected as having been detected is acquired and stored in the storage area a of the RAM 553. In step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 stores the time (seconds) of one cycle of the movable cycle in the storage area b of the RAM 553. In step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time obtained by subtracting the delay time stored in the storage area a from the time of the movable cycle stored in the storage area b in the storage area c of the RAM 553.

In step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is 0 seconds. If the result of the determination is 0 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2405, and if the result of the determination is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2407. Here, in the third symbol display device 42, from the time when the full tank is detected to the time when the movable pattern suggestion effect is started, the adjustment effect for congratulating the full tank of the holding device 400 (hereinafter, congratulations on the full tank). Direction) is displayed. There are 15 types of congratulations on the full tank from 1 second to 15 seconds, and the length of the effect is determined according to the timing of full tank detection. The full congratulations effect is displayed as a still image or a moving image, but in order to reduce the amount of memory used in the adjustment effect, it is displayed as an image with less information than the movable pattern suggestion effect.

In step S2405, 15 seconds are stored in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as an adjustment time for executing the 15-second full congratulations effect. In step S2406, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the adjustment time (15 seconds) stored in the storage area d and the congratulations effect on the full tank, and then switches the music C to the chorus part of the music B to suggest a movable pattern. Start the production.

In step S2407, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is less than 15 seconds. If the result of the determination is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2408, and if the result of the determination is greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2408, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time stored in the storage area c in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as an adjustment time for executing the congratulations effect. In step S2409, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the full congratulations effect for the time stored in the storage area d, then switches the music C to the chorus portion of the music A, and starts the movable pattern suggestion effect.

In step S2410, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is equal to 15 seconds. If the result of the determination is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2411, and if the result of the determination is not equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2413. In step S2411, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores 15 seconds in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as an adjustment time for executing the congratulations on full tank effect. In step S2412, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the full congratulations effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area d, then switches the music C to the chorus portion of the music A, and starts the movable pattern suggestion effect. ..

In step S2413, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is longer than 15 seconds. If the result of the determination is larger than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds from the time stored in the storage area c is stored in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the congratulations full tank effect. In step S2415, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the full congratulations effect for the time stored in the storage area d, then switches the music C to the chorus portion of the music B, and starts the movable pattern suggestion effect.

The adjustment time for executing the above-mentioned congratulations effect and the process of determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect process are stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 as shown in FIG. 72. This may be done using a table. In such a table, the delay time a for full tank detection corresponding to the time stored in the storage area a, the time b of the movable cycle corresponding to the time stored in the storage area b, and the storage area c are stored. The time c of (ba) corresponding to the time to be performed, the time d of the congratulations full tank corresponding to the time stored in the storage area d, and the movable pattern suggestion effect processing determined according to each time. The music is stored in advance. As a result, the processing speed of the above-mentioned steps can be improved.

In this way, when the music C is switched to the music A or the music B, the rhythm of the music A or the music B after the switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. As a result, the rhythm of the music A or the music B can be matched with the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Music switching processing according to the lower limit start time)
Next, the music switching process based on the lower limit start time described above will be described with reference to FIG. 71 with reference to step S2110A shown in FIG. 69.

As shown in FIG. 71, in step S2501, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not at least one game ball is held in the holding portion 403 of the holding device 400. Specifically, the determination is made based on the ball entry detection by the hold ball detection switch 437 and the discharge detection by the hold ball detection switch 438. If it is a determination result that at least one game ball is held, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if it is a determination result that the game ball is not held, this process ends. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 includes a lower limit number determination unit as a function of determining whether or not at least one ball and a game ball are reserved in the holding unit 403 of the holding device 400.

In step S2502, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is 1. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time flag 1, the process proceeds to step S2503, the music that has been played up to that point is switched to the chorus portion of the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. If the result of the determination is not the lower limit start time flag 1, the process proceeds to step S2504.

In step S2504, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is 2. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time flag 2, the process proceeds to step S2505, the music that has been played up to that point is switched to the chorus portion of the music A, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. If the result of the determination is not the lower limit start time flag 2, the process proceeds to step S2506.

In step S2506, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is 3. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time flag 3, the process proceeds to step S2507, the music that has been played up to that point is switched to the chorus portion of the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. If the result of the determination is not the lower limit start time flag 3, the process proceeds to step S2508.

In step S2508, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is 4. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time flag 4, the process proceeds to step S2509, the music that has been played up to that point is switched to the chorus portion of the music A, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. If the result of the determination is not the lower limit start time flag 4, the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is 5. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time flag 5, the process proceeds to step S2511, the music that has been played up to that point is switched to the chorus portion of the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

The process of determining the lower limit start time and the process of determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect effect process based on the lower limit start time are tables stored in ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 as shown in FIG. 73. It may be done using. In such a table, the delay time v of the fluctuation start corresponding to the time stored in the storage area v, the fluctuation time w before the start of the reach effect corresponding to the time stored in the storage area w, and the storage area x (V + w) time x corresponding to the time stored in, the reach effect time z, the lower limit start time y corresponding to the time stored in the storage area y, the type of the lower limit start time flag, and the lower limit start. The music being processed for suggesting a movable pattern according to time is stored in advance. As a result, the processing speed of the above-mentioned steps can be improved.

In this way, when at least one game ball is held at the timing when the reach effect time reaches the lower limit start time, the music C is switched to the music B and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. When the music C is switched to the music A or the music B, the rhythm of the music A or the music B after the switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. As a result, the rhythm of the music A or the music B can be matched with the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. Hereinafter, this movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with an example.

Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect in the normal gaming state and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestion effect by detecting full tank during the reach effect in the normal game state. FIG. 75 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestion effect based on the lower limit start time during the reach effect in the normal game state.

(Example 1 of movable pattern suggestion effect performed during reach effect in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 74, the distribution movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle composed of the same constant movable pattern as in the first to third embodiments. Here, in the normal game state, the variation display is started, and this variation pattern command is a super reach effect (the lottery result may be a hit or a miss), and the reach effect time is 120 seconds.

At this time, the above fluctuation display is started at the same timing as the movable timing t10 (22 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), and after the fluctuation display is performed for 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect, it is slightly smaller than the movable timing t11. The reach effect is started at a delayed timing (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle). For example, for 15 seconds from the start of the reach effect, a right-handed notification effect for causing the player to perform a right-handed game is performed. Music C is started at the same time as the start timing of the reach production.

If the player fires a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the reach effect, the full tank of the holding device 400 is detected 60 seconds after the start of the music C. The timing at which the holding device 400 is detected to be full is a timing slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern A (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle).

That is, the delay time a for full tank detection is 27 seconds, the time b for the movable cycle is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 3 seconds. Therefore, the time for the full tank congratulations production is The music that is 3 seconds long and is in the process of suggesting a movable pattern is music A (see also FIG. 72).

Therefore, after performing a congratulations on the full tank for 3 seconds from the timing of detecting the full tank of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern A, the music C is switched to the chorus part of the music A to start the movable pattern suggestion effect. To do. At the end of the movable pattern suggestion production, the music A is returned to the music C. After that, with the end of the reach production, the music C also ends.

In this way, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A and the timing of displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st5 are matched. be able to. As a result, the player successfully operates the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggested timings st1 to st5 to distribute the full tank (5 balls) of the game balls held by the holding device 400, and the movable valve 409. It is easy to put the ball in the general winning opening 31b. As a result, a maximum of 75 prize balls can be obtained during the reach production.

(Example 2 of movable pattern suggestion effect performed during reach effect in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 75, the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 is a case where the holding device 400 is not full in the same variation display as the above-mentioned movable pattern suggestion effect example 1.

In this example, the player fires a game ball in a right-handed game for about 40 seconds from the start of the reach production, and three game balls are held in the holding device 400, but then the firing of the game ball is stopped. To do. In this case, the full tank of the holding device 400 is not detected. Therefore, since at least one game ball is reserved, the movable pattern suggestion effect is performed at the timing when the reach effect time reaches the lower limit start time, and then the reach effect ends.

That is, the delay time v of the fluctuation start is 22 seconds, the time w from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect is 5 seconds, and the time x obtained by adding the time v and the time w is 27 seconds. Since the time z is 120 seconds, the lower limit start time y is 93 seconds, the type of the lower limit start time flag is 2, and the music during the movable pattern suggestion production is music A (see also FIG. 73).

Therefore, at the timing when 93 seconds have passed from the start of the reach production, the music C switches to the chorus part of the music A, and the movable pattern suggestion production is started. The music A is returned to the music C at the end of the movable pattern suggestion production. After that, with the end of the reach production, the music C also ends.

In this way, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A and the timing of displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st5 are matched. be able to. As a result, when at least one game ball is held when the lower limit start time is reached, it is possible to reduce the waste of the held game ball.

The full tank determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 described above corresponds to the upper limit number determination means of the present invention. The lower limit start time determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 described above corresponds to the lower limit timing determination means of the present invention. The lower limit number determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 described above corresponds to the lower limit number determination means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the holding device 400 holds the upper limit number of game balls held by the full tank determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262. When it is determined that the sub-control device 262 is used, the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the suggestion timing for displaying the operation request image as an effect that matches the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the complexity of the player due to the operation effect being displayed even when only the game balls that are less than the upper limit of the number of held games are held.

Further, by the time when the lower limit start time determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit start time, the lower limit number determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 at least holds the lower limit number ( When it is determined that the game ball (1 ball) is held, the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position at the timing when the operation request image is displayed by the effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262. The operation effect according to the timing is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, even if the full tank determination unit determines that the upper limit number of game balls to be held is not held in the holding device 400, at least one ball is reached before the execution time of the reach effect reaches the lower limit start time. When it is determined that the game ball is held, the third symbol display device is a movable pattern suggestion effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. Since it is displayed on 42, even though the game ball is held on the holding device 400, the attenuation of the game motivation due to the fact that the movable pattern suggestion effect is not displayed only because the holding upper limit number is not reached is reduced. it can.

In the sixth embodiment described above, when the game balls held by the holding device 400 are full during the reach effect in the normal game state, or when the reach effect time reaches the lower limit start time, at least one ball is used. The movable pattern suggestion effect was executed based on the game ball being held, but the game ball held by the holding device 400 is full not only during the reach effect in the normal game state but also during the jackpot state. The movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed based on the fact or the latest round (lower limit start round) for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect. Since the movable pattern suggestion effect based on the full tank detection in the holding device 400 is the same as the content described in the sixth embodiment, the details thereof will be referred to in the sixth embodiment.

The movable pattern suggestion effect based on the lower limit start round performed by the sub control device 262 during the jackpot state will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. Note that FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start round performed by the sub control device 262. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a music switching timing adjustment process in the lower limit start round by the sub control device 262. FIG. 79 is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music being processed for the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process)
The open / close mode (big hit) display setting process of this embodiment is different from the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process described with reference to FIG. 26 in the first embodiment in the process for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect effect process. Therefore, this point will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 76, in step S2603, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a start music determination process for determining the music to be played first in the jackpot production. When the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, it is determined that the music D is the starting music. In the case of a jackpot production with the maximum number of other rounds, it is decided that the other song is the starting song.

In step S2606, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the game ball held by the holding device 400 is full (full tank detection). If the result of the determination is full, the process proceeds to step S2607, and if the result of the determination is not full, the process proceeds to step S2609. In step S2607, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by detecting the full tank.

The movable pattern suggestion effect processing of this embodiment is the same as the movable pattern suggestion effect process by full tank detection described with reference to FIG. 68 in Example 6. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the full tank detection in the same manner. Further, the music switching timing adjustment process executed in the movable pattern suggestion effect processing of this embodiment is the same as the music switching timing adjustment process by full tank detection described with reference to FIG. 70 in Example 6. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, the timing of switching from the music D during the jackpot production to the music during the movable pattern suggestion production processing is adjusted based on the full tank detection.

In step S2609, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the jackpot round has reached the lower limit start round. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start round, the process proceeds to step S2610, and if the result of the determination is not the lower limit start round, the process proceeds to step S2112. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 includes a lower limit start round determination unit as a function of determining whether or not the jackpot round has reached the lower limit start round.

In step S2610, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start round for performing the movable pattern suggestion effect when the lower limit start round is reached.

(Movable pattern suggestion effect processing by lower limit start round)
Here, the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start round will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In step S2610A, the music switching timing adjustment process is performed by the lower limit start round described later, and the process proceeds to step S2610B. In step S2610B, a display command for displaying a movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music switched in step S2610A is set, and the process proceeds to step S2610C.

In step S2610C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion effect is completed. As a result of the determination, if the movable pattern suggestion effect is completed, the process proceeds to step S26110D, and if not, the present process is terminated. In step S2610D, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion production to the music D at the start of the jackpot production.

(Music switching timing adjustment processing in the lower limit start round)
The music switching process in the lower limit start round described above in step S2610A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 78, in step S2901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not at least one game ball is held in the holding portion 403 of the holding device 400. If it is a determination result that at least one game ball is held, the process proceeds to step S2902, and if it is a determination result that the game ball is not held, this process ends.

In step S2902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 takes from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the 14th round designation command indicating the start of the 14th round, which is the lower limit round. The time (delay time) is acquired and stored in the storage area e of the RAM 553. In step S2903, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 stores the time of the movable cycle (15 seconds) in the storage area f of the RAM 553.

In step S2904, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time obtained by subtracting the delay time stored in the storage area e from the time of the movable cycle stored in the storage area f in the storage area g of the RAM 553.

In step S2905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area g is 0 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is 0 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2906, and if it is not 0 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2908. In step S2906, 15 seconds is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect. The process proceeds to step S2907. In step S2907, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area h, and then starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the chorus portion of the music B.

In step S2908, it is determined whether or not the time stored in the storage area g is less than 15 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2909, and if it is not less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2911. In step S2909, the time stored in the storage area g as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553. In step S2910, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area h, and then starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the chorus portion of the music A.

In step S2911, it is determined whether the time stored in the storage area g is equal to 15 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2912, and if it is not less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2914. In step S2912, 15 seconds is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect. In step S2913, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area h, and then starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the chorus portion of the music A.

In step S2914, it is determined whether or not the time stored in the storage area g is longer than 15 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2915. In step S2915, as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect, the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds from the time stored in the storage area g is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553. In step S2916, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area h, and then starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the chorus portion of the music B.

The adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect as described above and the process of determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect process are the tables stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 as shown in FIG. 79. It may be done using. In such a table, the delay time e of the lower limit start round (14R) designation command corresponding to the time stored in the storage area e, the time f of the movable cycle corresponding to the time stored in the storage area f, and The time g of (fe) corresponding to the time stored in the storage area g, the time h of the adjustment effect corresponding to the time stored in the storage area h, and the movable pattern suggestion effect determined according to each time. The music being processed is stored in advance. As a result, the processing speed of the above-mentioned steps can be improved.

In this way, when at least one game ball is held at the timing when the lower limit start round (14 rounds) is reached after the movable pattern suggestion effect based on the full tank detection is executed during the jackpot state, After performing the adjustment effect for a predetermined time, the music D is switched to the chorus portion of the music A or the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. When the music D is switched to the chorus part of the music A or the music B, the rhythm of the chorus part of the music A or the music B after the switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. As a result, the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A or the music B can be matched with the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the following, this movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with an example.

Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 based on the full tank detection during the jackpot effect and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. FIG. 80 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 based on the full tank detection during the jackpot effect and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 81 is a timing chart following FIG. 80.

(Example of movable pattern suggestion production performed based on full tank detection during jackpot production)
As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the distribution movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle composed of the same constant movable pattern as in Examples 1 to 5. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot state has a maximum number of rounds of 16 and a minimum number of rounds of 14. The jackpot state starts 20 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. At this timing, the jackpot production accompanied by the music D is started.

If the player fires a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the jackpot effect, the full tank of the holding device 400 is detected about 75 seconds after the start of the jackpot effect. The timing at which the holding device 400 is detected to be full is a timing slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern A (5 seconds after the start of the movable cycle).

That is, the delay time a for full tank detection is 5 seconds, the time b for the movable cycle is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 25 seconds. Therefore, the time for the full tank congratulations production is It is 10 seconds, and the music during the movable pattern suggestion production is music B (see also FIG. 72).

Therefore, after performing a congratulations on the full tank for 10 seconds from the timing of detecting the full tank of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern B, the music D is switched to the chorus part of the music B, and the movable pattern accompanied by the music B is performed. Start suggestion production.

As a result, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B and the timing of displaying the operation request image according to the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music B, that is, the suggested timings st6 to st10 are matched. Can be done. As a result, the player successfully operates the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggested timings st6 to st10 to distribute the full tank (5 balls) of the game balls held in the holding device 400, and the movable valve 409. It is easy to put the ball in the general winning opening 31b. After the movable pattern suggestion production is completed, the music B is switched to the music D, and the jackpot production by the music D is continued again.

It is assumed that the game balls are continuously fired even after the full tank is detected, and three game balls are held by the holding device 400 when the 14th round is reached. At this time, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the condition that at least one or more game balls are held at the start of the 14th round. The start time of the 14th round coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A.

That is, the delay time e of the 14R designation command is 0 seconds, the time f of the movable cycle is 30 seconds, and the time g obtained by subtracting the time e from the time f is 30 seconds, so that the time h of the adjustment effect is 15. It is seconds, and the music during the movable pattern suggestion production is music B (see also FIG. 79).

Therefore, after the adjustment effect is performed for 15 seconds from the start of the lower limit start round, the music D is switched to the chorus part of the music B according to the start timing of the movable pattern B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music B is performed. Is started. Thereby, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B and the suggested timings st5 to st10 for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music B can be matched. As a result, if the second frame button 21 is successfully operated in accordance with the suggested timings st5 to st10, the three game balls left in the holding device 400 can be placed on the distribution movable valve 409, and the general winning opening It becomes easy to enter the ball into 31b. Since the end timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect overlaps with the end timing of the jackpot state, the jackpot state ends with the music B as it is.

The lower limit start round determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 described above corresponds to the lower limit timing determination unit of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the operation effect is the effect control unit when the full tank determination unit determines that the upper limit number of game balls to be held is held in the hold device. Since the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed according to the timing when the operation request image is displayed at the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position, when only the game balls less than the upper limit of the number of holding balls are held. It is possible to reduce the complexity of the player due to the display of the operation effect.

Further, when the lower limit start round determination unit determines that the jackpot round reaches the lower limit start round, at least the lower limit number of reserved game balls (for example, one ball) is determined to be held by the lower limit number determination unit. In addition, the effect control unit displays on the third symbol display device 42 a movable pattern suggestion effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. As a result, even if the full tank determination unit determines that the full game ball is not held by the holding device 400, at least the lower limit of the number of holdings is reached before the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing. When it is determined that the game ball is held, the third symbol display device 42 is provided with an operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the second position. Since it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the attenuation of the game motivation due to the fact that the movable pattern suggestion effect is not displayed only because the game ball is held in the holding device 400 but the holding upper limit number is not reached.

In Examples 1 to 7 described above, the movable pattern suggestion effect includes one accompanied by music A and one accompanied by music B, but each production cannot be intentionally selected by the player. There was no clear difference in the difficulty and ease of operation of the movable pattern suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as the difficulty level). Therefore, in the movable pattern suggestion effect of this embodiment, it is assumed that the player can select the difficulty level and the difficulty level is clearly different.

The movable pattern suggestion effect in which the difficulty level can be selected by the player performed by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a difficulty level selection process of the movable pattern suggestion effect by the sub control device 262.

(Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process)
As shown in FIG. 82, the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting process of this embodiment is the opening / closing mode (big hit) described with reference to FIG. 76 in the seventh embodiment, except for the difficulty level selection process of the movable pattern suggestion effect. ) Same as the display setting process. Therefore, the difficulty level selection process of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described below, and the description of the seventh embodiment will be referred to for other processes.

In step S2603A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a difficulty level selection process of the movable pattern suggestion effect so that the player can select the difficulty level of the operation of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 includes a difficulty level selection display unit as a function of displaying a selected image for making it possible to select the difficulty level of the operation of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Difficulty selection process for movable pattern suggestion production)
As shown in FIG. 83, in step S3001, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 analyzes the content of the opening command and determines whether or not the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state is 16. When the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state is 16 rounds, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed, so the process proceeds to step S3002 to perform the difficulty level selection process. If the number of rounds in the jackpot state is not 16 rounds, this process ends.

In step S3002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the difficulty level selection image for allowing the player to select whether the difficulty level of the operation of the movable pattern suggestion effect is "normal" or "easy". It is displayed on the display device 42. The difficulty level selection image is displayed during the opening effect period.

In step S3003, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether the player has selected "normal" or "easy" as the difficulty level of the operation of the movable pattern suggestion effect. If it is determined that the player has selected "normal" (step S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, and if it is determined that the player has selected "easy" (step S3003: NO), the step Proceed to S3005.

In step S3004, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the display command is the display command of the normal mode when the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed. In step S3005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the display command is a display command in an easy mode when the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed.

When it is determined in step S3004 that the display command of the movable pattern suggestion effect command is set to the normal mode, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed in the normal mode. When it is determined in step S3005 that the display command of the movable pattern suggestion effect command is set to the easy mode, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed in the easy mode.

The timings of the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggested image display in the movable pattern suggestion effect example in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movable pattern A of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion image display. 85 (a) to 85 (c) are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movable pattern B different from that of FIG. 84 of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion image display. FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. 87 (a) and 87 (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 86.

The timing of the movable pattern A of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggested image display in the movable pattern suggestion effect example in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIG. 84. An image (a) explaining the rhythm game is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 for 1.0 second from 0.0 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 1.0 second after the start of the movable cycle. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the image (a) is displayed as a "rhythm game easy mode" indicating that the movable pattern suggestion effect is an easy mode selected by the player.

From 1.0 second after the start of the movable cycle to 9.0 seconds after the start of the movable cycle, an image (a) notifying the start of the rhythm game is displayed. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), the image (a) explains the operation method of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode. "When the continuous hit! Mark overlaps the drum, the drum button is repeatedly hit. Please do. ”The operation explanation image 423 is displayed. During this period, the movable timing t1 to the movable timing t3 of the movable pattern A arrive, but the operation request image indicating the suggested timing is not displayed.

An image (c) indicating that the operation timing of the second frame button 21 is approaching is displayed in 0.85 seconds from the start of the movable cycle of 9.00 seconds to the start of the movable cycle of 9.85 seconds. .. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the image (c) is displayed as an image in which the continuous hit request image 436 representing the characters "continuous hit!" Approaches the operation timing image 425.

An image (d) notifying that the operation timing of the second frame button 21 is set is displayed for 1.5 seconds from 9.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 11.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the image (d) is displayed as an image (d) in which the continuous hit request image 436 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425. The movable timing t4 and the movable timing t5 arrive in 1.5 seconds when the overlapping image (d) is displayed. The 1.5 seconds when the overlapped image (d) is displayed is called the suggestion timing st11.

Of the period in which the overlapped image (d) is displayed, 9.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (that is, the reference numeral of "d1" in the figure) shown by diagonal lines in FIGS. 84 (b) and (c). 0.5 seconds from the timing "D1" with the mark (hereinafter, also referred to as the same) to 10.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing "D2") and 10.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. Any of the timings when the player repeatedly hits the second frame button 21 in any of 0.5 seconds from (timing "d3") to 11.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing "d4"). If the swords overlap, the game balls discharged from the holding device 400 get on the distribution movable valve 409 shown in either the movable timing t4 or the movable timing t5, are guided to the general winning opening 31b, and win the general winning opening 31b. To do. Further, in order to obtain such a result, the time from the pressing of the second frame button 21 to the start of driving the discharge blocking valve 406 and the time for the displacement blocking valve 406 to be displaced between the holding position and the discharging position are appropriately adjusted. ..

After 11.35 seconds from the start of the movable cycle, an image (e) informing that the operation timing of the second frame button 21 has ended is displayed. The image (e) is displayed as an image in which the continuous hit request image 439 moves away from the operation timing image 425 or disappears from the display screen. After 15.0 seconds from the start of the movable cycle, the movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music A ends.

The timing of the movable pattern B of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggested image display in the movable pattern suggestion effect example in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the following, the period during which the above-mentioned overlapping image (d) is displayed will be mainly described.

The above-mentioned overlapping image (d) is displayed for 2.5 seconds from 19.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 22.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. The movable timing t8 to the movable timing t10 arrive in 2.5 seconds when the overlapping image (d) is displayed. The 2.5 seconds when the overlapped image (d) is displayed is called the suggestion timing st12.

Of the period in which the overlapping image (d) is displayed, the movable cycle starts 19.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing “d5”), which is shown by diagonal lines in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b). 0.5 seconds until 20.35 seconds after the start (timing "d6") and 21.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing "d7") from 20.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing "d7"). 0.5 seconds until the start of the movable cycle (8 ”), and 0.5 seconds from 21.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing“ D 9 ”) to 22.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing D10). If any of the timings at which the player repeatedly hits the second frame button 21 overlaps with any of the above, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is distributed and movable as shown in any of the movable timing t8 to the movable timing t10. Riding on the valve 409, he is guided to the general winning opening 31b and wins the general winning opening 31b.

Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with the operation of pressing the second frame button 21 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A or the music B, such as the operation in the movable pattern suggestion production in the normal mode, the movable pattern in the easy mode In the suggestion effect, if the second frame button 21 is repeatedly hit while the overlapping image (d) is displayed, at least one of the full game balls held in the holding device 400 is surely distributed. It becomes easy to put it on the movable valve 409 and guide it to the general winning opening 31b to win a prize in the general winning opening 31b.

The operation mode of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode described above corresponds to the first operation mode of the present invention, and the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode is the first operation effect of the present invention. Equivalent to. The operation mode of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode described above corresponds to the second operation mode of the present invention, and the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode corresponds to the second operation effect of the present invention. .. The difficulty level selection display unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 described above corresponds to the difficulty level selection display means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern suggestion effect includes at least a movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode and a movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode. The difficulty level selection display unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 can select at least which of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode and the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode is to be displayed. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 displays the movable pattern suggestion effect selected during the display of the selected image on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, the player who does not like the difficult operation can select the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode, and the player who does not like it can select the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode. In this way, it is possible to provide a movable pattern suggestion effect according to the player's preference.

In Examples 1 to 8 described above, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the length of one cycle is 30 with the period from the start of the movable pattern A to the end of the movable pattern B as one cycle (hereinafter, also referred to as a movable cycle). Although the distribution operation for a second is periodically repeated, a plurality of types of movable pattern suggestion effects may be executed according to a plurality of types of movable cycles having different lengths. In this embodiment, a game machine having a plurality of types of movable cycles having different lengths and changing the movable cycle at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on to the game machine main body to execute the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described.

In this embodiment, as a predetermined timing for changing the movable cycle after the power is turned on to the game machine main body, for example, the start of a jackpot state with a maximum number of rounds of 8 will be described as an example.

In Examples 1 and 6, when the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state is 16 rounds, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, in the right-handed game, the game balls are placed in the holding device 400 at a rate of 1 in 15 balls. It takes 75 seconds for the full tank (5 balls) of the game ball to be held, and even if the distribution movable valve 409 executes the movable pattern suggestion effect in a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle, the movable pattern suggestion effect is produced. Was fully feasible. However, as the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state becomes smaller than 16 rounds, it is expected that the movable pattern suggestion effect cannot be executed in the above-mentioned movable cycle.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of movable cycle and movable pattern suggestion effect are prepared, and even in a jackpot state where the maximum number of rounds is less than 16 rounds, distribution operation and movable pattern suggestion effect are executed in the corresponding movable cycle. enable.

Specifically, this embodiment has 8 rounds in addition to 2 rounds and 16 rounds as the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state. When a jackpot state with a maximum number of rounds of 8 occurs, a movable pattern suggestion effect for 10 seconds is executed based on the detection that the holding device 400 holds 3 game balls. In response to the effect of suggesting a movable pattern for 10 seconds, the distribution movable valve 409 repeats the movable pattern C for 10 seconds and the movable pattern D for 10 seconds with a movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle. The configuration required for such a game machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92.

Note that FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a normal process by the main control device 261 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a movable cycle changing process of the distribution movable valve 409 in the normal process of FIG. 88. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub control device 262 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a table for determining the adjustment time and the music being processed for suggesting a movable pattern. FIG. 92 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the 8-round jackpot state.

In the following description, when the right-handed game is continued in the jackpot state, the time required from the start to the end of one round is 10 seconds, and the time required for the jackpot state of eight rounds is 80 seconds. Further, it is assumed that 60 game balls are fired in 60 seconds in a right-handed game.

In Examples 1 to 8, as shown in step S112 of FIG. 11, the distribution movable valve 409 was repeatedly driven at the same time as the power was turned on, with a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle described above. In addition to this, when a jackpot state with a maximum number of rounds of 8 occurs, the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 is changed. That is, as shown in step S207A of FIG. 88, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 includes a movable cycle changing unit as a function of changing the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 in the normal process. The movable cycle changing process for changing the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 will be described below.

(Processing to change the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve)
As shown in FIG. 89, in step S3101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot state with a maximum number of rounds of 8 has been won. If the maximum number of rounds is eight, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if the maximum number of rounds is not eight, this process ends. In step S3102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the opening effect. If it is the end timing of the opening effect, the process proceeds to step S3103, and if not, the present process is ended.

In step S3103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the movable cycle of one cycle of 30 seconds. If it is the end timing of the movable cycle of one cycle of 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3104, otherwise the main process ends. In step S3104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 from a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle to a movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle. As a result, the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 is continuously changed from the movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle to the movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle, so that the player is aware that the movable cycle is changed. It can be difficult.

In step S3105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect that notifies the end of the jackpot state. If it is the end timing of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S3106, and if not, the present process is ended. In step S3106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the movable cycle of one cycle of 20 seconds. If it is the end timing of the movable cycle of one cycle of 20 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3107, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S3107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 from a movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle to a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle. As a result, the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 is continuously returned from the movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle to the movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle, so that the player is aware that the movable cycle has been changed. It can be difficult.

(Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process)
Of the open / close mode (big hit) display setting processes of this embodiment, the process when the opening command is received and the process when the full tank is detected are the same as the processes described with reference to FIG. 66 and the like in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, a process different from the process of the sixth embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 90, in step S2606A, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives a signal other than the opening command (step S2601: NO), the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state is determined. If it is not in the jackpot state for 16 rounds, the process proceeds to step S2620.

In step S2620, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot state is the jackpot state of 8 rounds. If the jackpot is in the 8th round, the process proceeds to step S2621. In step S2621, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the holding of the game balls in the holding device 400 has reached three balls. When the game balls are continuously fired in the right-handed game from the start of the jackpot state, the holding of the game balls in the holding device 400 reaches 3 balls 45 seconds after the start of the jackpot state. If the determination result reaches 3 balls, the process proceeds to step S2622.

In step S2622, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by detecting three balls. The movement pattern suggestion effect processing by the three-ball detection includes the music switching timing adjustment processing by the three-ball detection, but FIG. 70 is shown in Example 6 except that the time of the movement cycle is 20 seconds. Since it is the same as the music switching timing adjustment process by the full tank detection described with reference to the above, the description of Example 6 and FIG. 70 will be referred to as appropriate.

The adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect and the process of determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect process are performed using the table stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 as shown in FIG. You may. In such a table, the delay time a for detecting three balls, the time b for the movable cycle, the time c for (ba), and the time d for the adjustment effect corresponding to the time stored in the storage area d are displayed. , Movable pattern suggestion determined according to each time The music being produced is stored in advance. Since the time of the movable cycle has been shortened from 30 seconds to 20 seconds, the music during the movable pattern suggestion production is the chorus portion of the music A of 10 seconds, which is the chorus part of the music A of 15 seconds (hereinafter, music A1). (Referred to as), or the chorus portion of the music B of 10 seconds (hereinafter, music B1), which is a shorter chorus portion of the music B of 15 seconds.

(Example of movable pattern suggestion production based on 3 ball detection during 8-round jackpot production)
As shown in FIG. 92, the movable cycle of one cycle of 30 seconds is changed to a movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle after the end timing of the opening effect has passed and at the timing of changing the movable cycle. The change timing of the movable cycle is the end timing of the even-numbered cycle of the movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle, counting from the start of the distribution operation accompanying the power-on. A movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle is started in accordance with the end timing of the even-numbered cycle of the movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle. Therefore, although it seems to the player that the distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409 is continuously continued, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the change timing of the movable cycle.

The movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 with one cycle of 20 seconds will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 with one cycle of 20 seconds starts from the start of the jackpot state and is executed in 10 seconds after the movable pattern A1 described later, and is executed in the subsequent 10 seconds. This is a pattern in which the movable pattern B1 described later is continuous. Specifically, the movable pattern A1 is a pattern in which the movable timing is 2 seconds (t1), 4 seconds (t2), 7 seconds (t3), and 10 seconds (t4) after the start of the movable cycle. , The movable pattern A is shortened (the latter half is omitted). The movable pattern B1 is a pattern in which the movable timing is 11 seconds (t7), 15 seconds (t8), 16 seconds (t9), and 17 seconds (t10) after the start of the movable cycle. It is a shortened pattern (the latter half is omitted).

If the player fires a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the jackpot effect, the three-ball hold of the holding device 400 is detected about 45 seconds after the start of the jackpot effect accompanied by the music D. The timing at which the three-ball hold of the holding device 400 is detected is a timing slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern A1 (15 seconds after the start of the movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle).

That is, the delay time a for detecting three balls is 15 seconds, the time b for the movable cycle is 20 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 5 seconds, so that the time for adjusting the effect is 5 seconds. The music being produced to suggest a movable pattern is music A1 (see also FIG. 91).

Therefore, after performing the adjustment effect for 5 seconds from the timing of detecting the three balls of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern A1, the music D is switched to the music A1 and the movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music A1 is started. ..

Thereby, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t2 to t4 constituting the movable pattern A1 and the timing of displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music A1, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st3 can be matched. After the movable pattern suggestion effect is completed, the music A1 is switched to the music D, and the jackpot production by the music D is continued again.

The movable cycle changing unit of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 described above corresponds to the movable cycle changing means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409 has a first movable cycle (for example, a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle) and a second movable cycle having different cycles. It has a plurality of types of movable cycles including (for example, a movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle), and is changed from the first movable cycle to the second movable cycle or the second movable cycle by the movable cycle changing unit of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. Even if the movable cycle is changed from the cycle to the first movable cycle, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is adjusted to the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 according to the type of the changed movable cycle. The pattern suggestion effect is displayed by the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the operation timing of the distribution movable valve 409 as compared with the case where the distribution operation is performed in the same movable cycle.

In Examples 1 to 8, the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 was a movable pattern in which the movable pattern A of 15 seconds and the movable pattern B of 15 seconds were repeated in one cycle of 30 seconds. The time of the movable cycle may be the same, or a plurality of types of movable patterns having different movable timings may be used. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of movable patterns having different movable timings, and the movable patterns are changed at predetermined timings after the power is turned on to the game machine main body to execute the movable pattern suggestion effect.

In this embodiment, as a predetermined timing for changing the movable pattern after the power is turned on to the game machine main body, the start of the jackpot state in the probability change state will be described as an example.

If the music used for the movable pattern suggestion effect during the jackpot effect in the normal game state and the music used for the movable pattern suggestion effect during the jackpot effect in the probabilistic state are separated, the variation of the movable pattern suggestion effect increases. However, if the music used for the movable pattern suggestion effect during the jackpot effect is different between the normal game state and the probabilistic state, and the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is single, in each movable pattern suggestion effect, , The movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggested timing for displaying the operation request image may not match.

Therefore, as described above, if the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 in the jackpot state in the normal gaming state and the movable pattern in the jackpot state in the probability variation state are different, the movement during the jackpot production in the normal gaming state and the probability variation state Even if the music used for the pattern suggestion effect is divided, the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 in the movable pattern suggestion effect and the suggestion timing for displaying the operation request image can be matched. Hereinafter, the configuration required for such a game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96.

Note that FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device 261 of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a movable pattern changing process of the distribution movable valve 409 in the normal process of FIG. 93. FIG. 95 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the jackpot state in the probability variation state. FIG. 96 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example following FIG. 95. FIG. 97 is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 98 is a table following FIG. 97.

In the following description, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the detection of the full tank of the game ball held by the holding device 400 during the jackpot effect having a maximum number of rounds of 16.

(Normal processing)
As shown in step S207B of FIG. 93, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs the movable pattern changing process of the distribution movable valve 409 in the normal process. The movable pattern changing process of the distribution movable valve 409 will be described below.

(Movable pattern change processing of distribution movable valve)
As shown in FIG. 94, in step S3201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the probability of winning the current jackpot lottery is high. Since it is not necessary to change the movable pattern unless the probability is high (that is, if the probability is low), this process ends. If there is a high probability (that is, during the probability change state), the process proceeds to step S3203.

In the movable pattern changing process of the present embodiment, the initial movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is changed according to the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b when the jackpot lottery is won in the probabilistic state. , Change to a different movable pattern. In step S3203, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has "50,101,160,209,257" (hereinafter, group) among the values when the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b are high probabilities. If it is any of (referred to as a random number of 1), the process proceeds to step S3204, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3210.

In step S3204, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the opening effect. If it is the end timing of the opening effect, the process proceeds to step S3205, and if not, the present process is ended. In step S3205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the timing of changing the movable cycle according to the movable patterns A and B. If it is the timing to change the movable pattern, the process proceeds to step S3206, and the current movable patterns A and B are changed to the movable patterns A2 and B2 described later. If not, this process ends. As will be described later, the timing of changing the movable pattern is set to the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle counting from the start of the movable cycle accompanying the power-on.

In step S3207, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect that notifies the end of the jackpot state. If it is the end timing of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S3208, otherwise the process ends. In step S3208, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the change timing of the movable pattern. If it is the timing to change the movable pattern, the process proceeds to step S3209, and the movable patterns A2 and B2 are returned to the movable patterns A and B. If not, this process ends.

In step S3210, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has "310, 361, 418, 480, 517" (hereinafter, group) among the values when the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b are high probabilities. It is determined whether or not it is one of (called a random number of 2). If the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b correspond to these values, the process proceeds to step S3211, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3217.

In steps S3211 to S3213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is movable as long as the end timing of the opening effect has arrived and the timing of changing the movable pattern has arrived, as in steps S3204 to S3206 described above. The patterns A and B are changed to the movable patterns A3 and B3 described later. Further, in steps S3214 to S3216, if the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has reached the end timing of the ending effect and the return timing of the movable pattern has arrived, as in steps S3207 to S3209 described above. , The movable patterns A3 and B3 are returned to the movable patterns A and B.

In step S3217, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the remaining "578,635,677,730" (hereinafter, group) among the values when the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b are high probabilities. It is determined whether or not it is any of the random numbers of 3). If the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b correspond to these values, the process proceeds to step S3218.

In steps S3218 to S3220, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is movable as long as the end timing of the opening effect has arrived and the change timing of the movable pattern has arrived, as in steps S3204 to S3206 described above. Patterns A and B are changed to movable patterns A4 and B4 described later. Further, in steps S3221 to S3223, if the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has reached the end timing of the ending effect and the timing of changing the movable pattern has arrived, as in steps S3207 to S3209 described above. , The movable patterns A4 and B4 are returned to the movable patterns A and B.

(Example of movable pattern suggestion production during jackpot production when the movable pattern changes)
Here, in step S3106 described above, an example in which the movable patterns A and B are changed to the movable patterns A2 and B2 when any of the random numbers of the group 1 at the time of high probability is won, and the movable pattern suggestion effect in that case. An example will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, 10 seconds after the end timing of the opening effect (20 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle counting from the start of the movable cycle accompanying the power-on ( It is assumed that the change timing of the movable pattern) has arrived. The original movable patterns A and B are changed to different movable patterns A2 and B2 at the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle. Since the distribution movable valve 409 appears to the player to continuously move in the same movable pattern, it is difficult for the player to notice that the movable patterns A and B have been changed to the movable patterns A2 and B2. This makes it difficult to decipher the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409.

Specifically, the movable pattern A2 has an interval of 2 seconds from the start of the movable cycle, that is, 2 seconds later (t1), 4 seconds later (t2), 6 seconds later (t3), 8 seconds later (t4), 10 It has a movable timing after a second (t5) and 12 seconds (t6). The movable pattern B2 has an interval of 2 seconds from 1 second after the start of the movable cycle, that is, 16 seconds (t7), 18 seconds (t8), 20 seconds (t9), 22 seconds (t10), and 24 seconds. (T11), 26 seconds later (t12), the movable timing is provided. The movable timings of the movable patterns A1 and B1 are designed according to the rhythm of the songs R1 and S1 described later. As described above, the movable patterns A2 and B2 have a monotonous rhythm as compared with the movable patterns such as the movable patterns A and B in which the distribution movable valve 409 is randomly displaced to the protruding position, and the music R1 and R1 are for the player. The second frame button 21 is easy to operate according to S1.

The movable patterns A3 and B3 and the movable patterns A4 and B4 may have a movable timing that makes it easier (or harder to operate) the second frame button 21 according to the rhythm of the music than the movable patterns A2 and B2. The movable timings of the movable patterns A3 and B3 are designed according to the rhythm of the songs R2 and S2 described later. The movable timings of the movable patterns A4 and B4 are designed according to the rhythm of the songs R3 and S3 described later.

If the player fires a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the jackpot effect, the full tank of the holding device 400 is detected about 75 seconds after the start of the music D. The timing at which the holding device 400 is detected to be full is a timing slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern B2 (5 seconds after the start of the movable cycle).

That is, the delay time a for full tank detection is 5 seconds, the time b for the movable cycle is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 25 seconds. Therefore, the time for the full tank congratulations production is It is 10 seconds. Further, since the jackpot random number at the time of high probability is group 1, the music during the movable pattern suggestion production is music S1 (see also FIGS. 97 and 98).

Therefore, after performing a congratulations on the full tank for 10 seconds from the timing of detecting the full tank of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern B2, the music D is switched to the music S1, and the movable pattern suggestion production accompanied by the music S1 is performed. Is started. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B2 and the timing of displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music S1, that is, the suggested timings st6 to st10 can be matched.

After the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the music S1 is switched to the music D, and the jackpot effect by the music D is continued again, but the movable patterns remain the movable patterns A2 and B2 until the change timing is reached. After the ending effect is finished, the movable pattern is switched from the movable patterns A2 and B2 to the movable patterns A and B at the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle (timing of changing the movable pattern) counting from the start of the movable cycle accompanying the power-on. Then, the movable patterns A and B are restarted again. The timing at which the movable patterns A2 and B2 are returned to the movable patterns A and B is less likely to be noticed by the player, as is the timing at which the movable patterns A and B are changed to the movable patterns A2 and B2.

In this way, by increasing the types of movable patterns, the variation of the music of the movable pattern suggestion effect increases. Further, by making the movable timing of the movable pattern uniform or random, it is possible to change the ease of operation of the player in the movable pattern suggestion effect.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409 includes a first movable pattern (for example, movable patterns A and B) and a second movable pattern (for example, movable patterns A and B) having different movable timings. For example, it has a plurality of types of movable patterns including movable patterns A2 and B2), and even when the movable pattern is changed from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern by the movable pattern changing unit of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. The operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the timing at which the operation request image is displayed according to the changed type of the movable pattern to match the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to detect the operation timing of the distribution movable valve 409 than when the distribution operation is performed with the same movable pattern.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be modified as follows.

[1] In Examples 1 and 2, the main control device 261 controlled the drive of the distribution movable valve 409, but the sub control device 262 drives the distribution movable valve 409 at the same timing as in Examples 1 and 2. May be controlled.

[2] In Examples 1 and 2, the main control device 261 started driving the distribution movable valve 409 at the same time as the power was turned on in the main process shown in FIG. 11, but the start of the jackpot state, that is, 1 At the same time as opening the opening / closing door 32b of the large winning opening 32a in the round, the distribution movable valve 409 may be started to be driven at a fixed cycle. Since the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the start timing of the music A or the music B coincide with each other in advance, it is not necessary to perform the start timing adjustment process shown in Examples 1 and 2. Even in this case, since the driving of the distribution movable valve 409 is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the player visually operates the second frame button 42 according to the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409. Is not easy. Note that [2] corresponds to an embodiment different from Examples 1 and 2 of the invention described in (1) above.

[3] In Examples 1 and 2, up to 5 game balls can be held in the holding device 400, but the number of game balls that can be held may be smaller or larger than this. The number of game balls that can be held may be one. Further, in Examples 1 and 2, the number of holding devices 400 is one, but a plurality of holding devices 400 may be provided.

[4] In the first and second embodiments, the operation effect is a display effect accompanied by the reproduction of music, but the operation effect may be other than the display effect accompanied by the reproduction of music. For example, another example of the operation effect is an effect of only playing music, and the second frame button 21 may be operated according to only the rhythm of the music. Further, another example of the operation effect is an effect of only light emission, and the second frame button 21 may be operated only in accordance with the timing of light emission. In either case, the player may be instructed in advance of the rhythm of the music and the timing of light emission, and then the second frame button 21 may be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music and the timing of light emission.

[5] In the first and second embodiments, the operation request image is displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, but the operation request image may be displayed in accordance with other timings. For example, another example of the operation effect is a mogura hitting game. In this game, if you can operate the second frame button 21 at the timing when the image of the mole coming out of the hole (operation request image) is displayed and hit the mole's head well, the game ball from the holding device 400 Is designed so that the timing at which the feed is discharged matches the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position.

[6] In the second embodiment, the operation effect is displayed after the end of the jackpot state and during the super reach effect after the super reach is released, but the operation effect is displayed after the end of the jackpot state and the super reach is removed. It may be displayed during a period other than the later reach effect. This period may be during the fluctuation of the symbol or during the non-variation.

[7] The game boards 30 of Examples 1 and 2 have a configuration in which the player makes a so-called right-handed hit aiming at the large winning opening 32a arranged in the lower right game area 30a3 during the big hit state. 32a is arranged below the center of the game area 30a (below the first starting port 33a), and the holding device 400 is arranged on either the left or right side of the game area 30a (a configuration in which right-handed hitting is not required during the jackpot state). It doesn't matter.

[8] In Examples 1 and 2, the distribution movable valve 409 was operating at high speed, but the movement of the distribution movable valve 409 is difficult to see due to the decorative plate 413 and the movable decorative piece 415. For example, the distribution movable valve 409 may operate at a low speed. Even with such a configuration, the player can make it difficult to match the timing at which the game ball is discharged from the holding device 400 with the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position unless he / she participates in the operation effect. ..

[9] In the first and second embodiments, the holding state switching unit 405 is configured to include one discharge blocking valve 406, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration including two discharge blocking valves 406 may be provided. For example, the holding state switching unit 405 includes a first discharge blocking valve provided slightly downstream of the holding section 403 and a second discharge blocking valve provided further downstream than the first discharge blocking valve. The first discharge blocking valve and the second discharge blocking valve are alternately driven to the holding position and the discharging position. That is, when the first discharge blocking valve is driven to the discharge position, the second discharge blocking valve is driven to the holding position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge blocking valve, and the game ball is discharged from the holding portion 403. Not done.

When the first discharge blocking valve is driven to the holding position, the second discharging blocking valve is driven to the discharging position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge blocking valve, and the game ball held in the holding portion 403. Of these, only one game ball held most downstream is discharged from the holding portion 403. When the first discharge blocking valve is driven to the discharge position again, the second discharge blocking valve is driven to the holding position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge blocking valve, and the game is held in the holding portion 403. If there is a ball, the game ball moves to the downstream side by the amount of one discharged ball, but the game ball is not discharged from the holding portion 403. As a result, when the player presses the second frame button 21, the game balls can be reliably discharged one by one from the holding portion 403.

In a configuration example in which the first discharge blocking valve and the second discharge blocking valve are alternately driven to the holding position and the discharging position, for example, a solenoid is connected to each of the first discharging blocking valve and the second discharging blocking valve. Then, the two solenoids are alternately projected or attracted. Further, for example, a solenoid is connected to only one of the first discharge blocking valve 406 and the second discharge blocking valve, and one discharge blocking valve is driven according to the protrusion or suction of the solenoid, and the other discharge. The stop valve is configured to be driven in the opposite direction to one of the discharge stop valves by using a link mechanism.

[10] In Example 1, both the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 having the suggestion timing st1 to the suggestion timing st6 and the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3 and 4 having the suggestion timing st6 to the suggestion timing st10 have difficulty in the movable pattern suggestion effect. Although the degree did not change so much, a plurality of movable pattern suggestion effects with different difficulty levels may be prepared. In that case, the player may be able to select a plurality of movable pattern suggestion effects with different difficulty levels. For example, it is conceivable to notify the player that some game will be played during the jackpot state before the start of the jackpot state of 16 rounds, and let the player select the difficulty level of the game.

In this case, for example, when the player selects "difficult" as the difficulty level of the game, one of the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 1 and 2 in the movable pattern A is executed as in the first embodiment. However, when the player selects "easy" as the difficulty level of the game, one of the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3A and 4A obtained by modifying the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3 and 4 in the movable pattern B is executed. .. For example, in the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3A and 4A, the suggestion timings st6 and st10 in the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3 and 4 are eliminated, and the suggestion timings st7 to st9 are combined into one suggestion timing. That is, in the new suggested timing, from 19.95 seconds after the start of the movable cycle of the movable pattern B corresponding to the start time of the suggested timing st6 to 22.75 seconds after the end time of the suggested timing st9 ( (2.80 seconds), an overlapping image of the first operation request image 431 and the operation timing image 425 is displayed. An image instructing repeated pressing of the second frame button 21 is displayed according to the timing at which the overlapping image is displayed.

As a result, if the player can press the second frame button 21 several times in 2.80 seconds when the overlapping image is displayed, the distribution movable valve 409 will be divided three times at the movable timings t8 to t10 of the movable pattern B. Between the time when the tip protrudes to the position P2 and the time when the tip returns to the position P2, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is placed on the distribution movable valve 409 and easily guided to the general winning opening 31b. As a result, if "easy" is selected as the difficulty level of the game and five game balls are held in the holding device 400, even a player who is unfamiliar with the game can win a prize in the general winning opening 31b. It is possible to easily receive the profit of winning the prize ball. In the movable pattern suggestion effect of the second embodiment, the difficulty level may be similarly added so that the player can select the difficulty level during the game.

[11] In the second embodiment, the micro switch 418 for detecting whether or not the game ball of the holding unit 403 is held is provided, but the holding unit 403 is provided with a means for detecting the number of the game balls held. May be good. For example, one pass detection sensor for detecting a game ball entering the hold section 403 is provided at the entrance to the hold section 403, and a pass detection sensor for detecting the game ball discharged from the hold section 403 below the discharge blocking valve 406. Is provided. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 counts the number of game balls held in the holding unit 403 from the count number of the game balls entering the holding unit 403 and the count number of the game balls discharged from the holding unit 403. It has a function. In this way, it may be determined whether or not to display the movable pattern suggestion effect according to the number held by the holding device 400.

[12] In Examples 1 and 2, the variable winning device 32 is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter when the game ball is launched by the right-handed game, but the left-handed game and the right-handed game It may be arranged at a position where the game ball can enter even if the game ball is launched by any of the games.

[13] In Examples 1 and 2, the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is a repetition of one type of movable cycle, but a plurality of types of movable cycles may be provided. For example, the type of movable cycle may be changed each time the player finishes the game. In this case, since it is necessary to match the movable timing and the rhythm of the music each time the type of the movable cycle changes, the music used in the movable pattern suggestion production may be different, but different parts are used in the same music. You may. By increasing the types of movable cycles in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the movable timing of the movable cycle.

[14] In Examples 1 and 2, the movable pattern suggestion effect was displayed on the third symbol display device 42 on which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, but in a display device separate from the third symbol display device 42. A movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed. Further, the movable pattern suggestion effect is not limited to the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device, and the operation timing of a certain accessory may be made to correspond to the suggestion timing.

[15] In Examples 6, 7, 9 and 10, as shown in FIGS. 74, 80, 92 and 95, there are a plurality of types (1 second to 15 seconds) in which the length of time during which the adjustment effect is executed is different. Up to 15 types) were easy to adjust, but instead of fixing the length of time that the adjustment effect is executed, multiple types of movable that have different lengths of time that the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed A pattern suggestion effect may be prepared. The plurality of types of movable pattern suggestion effects include, for example, 15 types of movable pattern suggestion effects from 16 seconds to 30 seconds, a period of 1 to 15 seconds after the start not including the suggestion timing, and a start 16 including the suggestion timing. It is composed of a period of seconds to 30 seconds, and a rhythm game may be played in a period of 1 to 15 seconds after the start without driving the discharge blocking valve 405 even if the second frame button 21 is pressed. .. Even if a plurality of types of movable pattern suggestion effects having different lengths of time are prepared in this way, the operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed matches the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position is the first. 3 It can be displayed on the symbol display device 42.

[16] In Examples 6, 7, 9 and 10, as shown in FIGS. 74, 80, 92 and 95, the adjustment effect is the same length as the time during which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed ( Although the adjustment effect for 15 seconds) was included, the adjustment effect may not include the adjustment effect for 15 seconds. In this case, under the condition that the adjustment effect for 15 seconds was executed in Examples 6, 7, 9, and 10, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started without executing the adjustment effect. That is, in this modified example, a plurality of types (14 types of 1 second to 14 seconds) of movable pattern suggestion effects having a length shorter than the time length of the movable pattern suggestion effect (15 seconds) are prepared. As a result, in this modified example, the amount of memory used can be reduced as compared with the case where 15 types of adjustment effects of 1 second to 15 seconds are prepared as in Examples 6, 7, 9, and 10.

[17] The present invention may be implemented on various types of gaming machines (for example, first-class, third-class, etc.), or on pachinko machines of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as.). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be put into a special gaming state on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that is in a special gaming state when the ball enters a predetermined winning opening. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines that use game balls such as arranged ball type pachinko and sparrow balls.

[18] The embodiments for carrying out the invention, the inventions described in Examples 1 to 10 and the above-described modified examples are configured by appropriately changing, replacing, deleting, or combining, unless they conflict with each other. It is also possible to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

21 ... 2nd frame button (operation means)
30 ... Game board 30a ... Game area 30a 3 ... Lower right game area 31b ... General winning opening 42 ... Third symbol display device (display means)
400 ... Holding device (holding device)
409 ... Distribution movable valve (distribution member)
411 ... Distribution operation control unit (CPU 501 of main control device 261)
557 ... Operation effect control unit (CPU 551 of sub control device 262)

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area where game balls can flow down,
A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball flowing down the game area is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. Variable entry means that changes to the open state,
A ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not an advantageous gaming state is generated based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means is provided.
The symbol is variablely displayed in a manner according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means.
When the result of the lottery is a specific result, as the advantageous gaming state, by performing a right-handed game, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state occurs.
A gaming machine that switches to a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous gaming state.
At least, a holding device that changes to a holding state in which the game ball launched during the right-handed game can be held and a holding state in which the holding of the game ball is released.
A detection means for detecting whether or not a game ball is held in the holding device,
A winning opening in the game area, which is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball unless the hold is released from the holding device, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball.
An operating means that receives an operation of the player, including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the releasing state.
A distribution operation is performed that changes to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball whose hold has been released to win in the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball that has been released from holding to win in the winning opening. Sorting member and
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member,
An effect including the display of an operation request requesting the operation of the operation means, the operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is advantageous. the detection means in a state in which a gaming state in which the left-handed player after the game state end based on a predetermined condition is satisfied in the case of detecting the hold of the game ball, a command to display unit Operation effect A game machine characterized by being equipped with control means.

Images